Yamaha RX-V661 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-V661

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: de handleiding

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

RX-V661

Printed in Malaysia WJ70020

RX-V661

AV Receiver

Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

BRUKSANVISNING

GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

0069

HYPSON 0099

ITT 0068, 0131, 0267

ITV 0064, 0305

IMPERIAL 0027

INTERFUNK 0108

JVC 0068, 0072, 0094

JENSEN 0068

KEC 0064, 0305

KLH 0099

KAISUI 0099

KENWOOD 0068, 0094

KODAK 0062, 0064

KOLIN 0068, 0070

KORPEL 0099

LG 0064, 0069, 0072,

0507

LXI 0064

LENCO 0305

LEYCO 0099

LLOYD’S 0027

LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589

LOGIK 0099, 0267

LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131

M ELECTRONIC

0027

MEI 0062

MGA 0070, 0267

MGN TECHNOLOGY

0267

MTC 0027, 0267

MAGNASONIC

1305

MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066,

0108, 1808

MAGNIN 0267

MANESTH 0072, 0099

MARANTZ 0062, 0108

MARTA 0064

MATSUI 0375, 0379

MATSUSHITA

0062

MEDION 0375

MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064,

0066, 0074, 0075,

0131, 0267, 0334,

0375, 1264

MEMPHIS 0099

METZ 0064, 0374, 1589

MINOLTA 0069

MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,

0108, 0834

MOTOROLA 0062, 0075

MULTITECH 0027, 0099

MURPHY 0027

MYRYAD 0108

NAD 0131

NEC 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075, 0094, 0131

NATIONAL 0253

NECKERMANN 0108

NESCO 0099

NEWAVE 0064

NIKKO 0064

NOBLEX 0267

NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267

NORDMENDE 0068, 0347

OCEANIC 0027, 0068

OKANO 0342, 0375

OLYMPUS 0062, 0253

OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131,

0459

ORION 0211, 0375, 0379,

1506

OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099

OTTO VERSAND 0108

PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099

PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,

0643, 1062, 1589

PATHE MARCONI 0068

PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069,

0267, 1062, 1264

PENTAX 0069

PERDIO 0027

PHILCO 0062

PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645,

1108, 1208

PHONOLA 0108

PILOT 0064

PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108

POLK AUDIO 0108

PROFITRONIC 0267

PROLINE 0027

PROSCAN 0087, 1087

PROTEC 0099

PULSAR 0066

PYE 0108

QUASAR 0062, 1062

QUELLE 0108

RCA 0062, 0069, 0087,

0267, 0834, 1062,

1087

RADIOSHACK 0027

RADIOLA 0108

RADIX 0064

RANDEX 0064

REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064,

0074, 0075, 0131

REOC 0375

REPLAYTV 0641, 0643

REX 0068

ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,

0305

RUNCO 0066

SBR 0108

SEG 0267

SEI 0108

STS 0069

SABA 0068, 0347

SALORA 0070

SAMPO 0064, 0075

SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459

SANKY 0066, 0075

SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094,

1506

SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267

SAVILLE 0379

SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,

0131

SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108

SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211

SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064,

0069, 0074, 0131,

1264

SELECO 0068

SEMP 0072

SHARP 0075, 0834

SHINTOM 0099, 0131

SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131

SILVA 0064

SINGER 0072, 0099

SINUDYNE 0108

SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643

SONTEC 0064

SONY 0027, 0059, 0060,

0062, 0663, 1259

SUNKAI 0375

SUNSTAR 0027

SUNTRONIC 0027

SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108,

0070, 1808

SYMPHONIC 0027

TMK 0267

TANDY 0027, 0131

TASHIKO 0027, 0064

TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072,

0094, 0108

TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305,

0334, 0669

TECHNICS 0062, 0253

TECO 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075

TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064

TELEAVIA 0068

TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347

TENOSAL 00 99

TENSAI 0027

THOMAS 0027

THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094,

0347

THORN 0068, 0131

TIVO 0645, 0663

TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072,

0094, 0108, 0872

TOTEVISION 0064, 0267

UHER 0267

UNITECH 0267

UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,

0267

VECTOR 0072

VICTOR 0068, 0094

VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072

VIDEOMAGIC 0064

VIDEOSONIC 0267

VILLAIN 0027

WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069,

0074, 0075, 0087,

0099, 0108, 0267

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0099

XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099

YAMAHA 0068

YAMISHI 0099

YOKAN 0099

YOKO 0267

ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066,

1506

RX-V661_G-cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, December 19, 2006 10:57 PM

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least

30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on

the back of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,

or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to

this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha

will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use

of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and

outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit

during a lightning storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power

plug can be reached easily.

17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common

operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release it

outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, and then

disconnect the AC power plug from the AC wall outlet.

19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:

Asia model ............................ 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

General model ........ 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunshine, fire or like.

■ For U.K. customers

If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the

plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and

an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the

instructions described below.

The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a

plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live

socket outlet.

■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model

Caution: Read this before operating your unit.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,

it is not disconnected from the AC power source even

if you turn off this unit by MASTER ON/OFF. In this

state, this unit is designed to consume a very small

quantity of power.

Note

IMPORTANT

THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN

ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:

Blue: NEUTRAL

Brown: LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus

may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying

the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured

BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be

connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or

coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth

terminal of the three pin plug.

This symbol mark is according to the

EU directive 2002/96/EC.

This symbol mark means that electrical

and electronic equipment, at their end-

of-life, should be disposed of separately

from your household waste.

Please act according to your local rules

and do not dispose of your old products

with your normal household waste.

1 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

English

Notice ....................................................................... 2

Features ................................................................... 3

Supplied accessories .................................................. 3

Getting started ........................................................ 4

Quick start guide .................................................... 5

Connections........................................................... 11

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening

room ................................................................... 28

Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 28

Selecting the SCENE templates........................... 33

Selecting the desired SCENE template.................... 33

Creating your original SCENE templates................ 36

Playback ................................................................ 37

Basic procedure ....................................................... 37

Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 38

Selecting the front speaker set ................................. 38

Selecting audio input jacks

(AUDIO SELECT).............................................. 39

Displaying the current status of this unit on a video

monitor ................................................................ 39

Using your headphones............................................ 40

Muting the audio output........................................... 40

Playing video sources in the background of an audio

source................................................................... 40

Displaying the input source information ................. 40

Using the sleep timer ............................................... 41

Sound field programs.......................................... 42

Selecting sound field programs ............................... 42

Sound field program descriptions............................ 42

Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decod-

ing mode)............................................................. 47

Using audio features ............................................. 48

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 48

Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 48

Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 48

Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo ....49

Selecting the night listening mode........................... 49

FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 50

Automatic tuning ..................................................... 50

Manual tuning.......................................................... 50

Automatic preset tuning........................................... 51

Manual preset tuning ............................................... 51

Selecting preset stations........................................... 52

Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 52

Radio Data System tuning

(Europe model only)......................................... 53

Displaying the Radio Data System information ...... 53

Selecting the Radio Data System program type (PTY

SEEK mode)........................................................ 54

Using the enhanced other networks (EON) data ser-

vice ...................................................................... 55

Using iPod™.......................................................... 56

Controlling iPod™................................................... 56

Recording .............................................................. 58

Advanced sound configurations...........................59

Changing sound field parameter settings................. 59

Selecting decoders ................................................... 64

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP).........67

Using SET MENU................................................... 69

1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 70

2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 76

3 OPTION MENU................................................... 79

Remote control features........................................82

Using the remote control for the SCENE feature .... 82

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 83

Setting remote control codes ................................... 85

Programming codes from other remote controls ..... 87

Changing source names in the display window....... 88

Macro programming features .................................. 89

Clearing configurations ........................................... 92

Using multi-zone configuration............................95

Connecting Zone 2................................................... 95

Controlling Zone 2................................................... 96

Advanced setup......................................................98

Using the advanced setup ........................................ 98

Troubleshooting...................................................102

Resetting the system............................................109

Glossary................................................................110

Sound field program information......................112

Parametric equalizer information .....................113

Specifications .......................................................114

Index.....................................................................116

(at the end of this manual)

Front panel................................................................i

Remote control ....................................................... ii

List of remote control codes ................................. iii

Contents

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

APPENDIX

“1SPEAKERS” or “

DVD” (example) indicates the name

of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to

the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for

the information about each position of the parts.

NOTICE

2 En

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

DTS-ES | NEO:6 | 96/24. Product “DTS” and “DTS-ES | NEO:6”

are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.

“96/24” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.

“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the

U.S. and other countries.

“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia

Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA

CORPORATION.

Notice

About this manual

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the

buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote

control. In case the button names differ between the front

panel and the remote control, the button name on the

remote control is given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and

specifications are subject to change in part as a result of

improvements, etc. In case of differences between the

manual and product, the product has priority.

•“1SPEAKERS” or “

DVD” (example) indicates the

name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control.

Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this

manual for the information about each position of the

parts.

•

The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the

corresponding reference page(s).

iPod

Features

3 En

INTRODUCTION

English

Built-in 7-channel power amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS output power

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)

Front: 90 W + 90 W

Center: 90 W

Surround: 90 W + 90 W

Surround back: 90 W + 90 W

SCENE function

◆ 17 preset SCENE templates for various situations

◆ 4 original SCENE templates for customizing capability

◆ Controlling Yamaha SCENE control signal support

component (some models only) working with the SCENE

function

Sound field programs

◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound

fields

◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound

quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to

that of a high-quality stereo

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix, Discrete, DTS Neo:6,

DTS 96/24 decoder

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx

decoder

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA

Sophisticated FM/AM tuner

◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)

◆ Radio Data System capability (Europe model only)

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition

video (includes 1080p video signal transmission) as well as

multi-channel digital audio based on HDMI version 1.2a

iPod controlling capability

◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock

(such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod

(Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini

◆ Playback information displaying capability

◆ Battery charging capability

Other features

◆ YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for

automatic speaker setup

◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize

this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system

◆ 5.1 or 7.1-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi-

channel input

◆ S-video signal input/output capability

◆ Component video input/output capability includes

(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)

◆ Digital video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S-video

→ component video) capability for monitor out

◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources

◆ Cinema and music night listening modes

◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes capability

◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility

◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and Zone 2

using ZONE CONTROL

◆ Bi-amplification connection capability

◆ Sleep timer

Check that you received all of the following parts.

The form of the supplied accessories varies depending on the models.

Features

Supplied accessories

Note

AUX/DOCK

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDIO

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

1234

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

FREQ/TEXT EON MODE-PTY SEEK-START

VOLUME

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

SLEEP

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

NIGHT

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

ENHANCER

MOVIE

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV/CBL

VCR

DVR

DVD

TUNER

MD/CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH IN

POWER

SCENE

POWER

STANDBY

TV VOL TV CH

Remote control

Batteries (4)

(AAA, R03, UM-4)

AM loop antenna

Optimizer microphone

Indoor FM antenna

GETTING STARTED

4 En

■ Installing batteries in the remote control

1 Press the part and slide the battery

compartment cover off.

2 Insert the four supplied batteries

(AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity

markings (+ and –) on the inside of the

battery compartment.

3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.

• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following

conditions:

– the operation range of the remote control decreases.

– the transmit indicator (

) does not flash or its light becomes

dim.

• Do not use an old battery together with a new one.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before

installing new batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose

of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2

minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,

the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory

is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code

and program any acquired functions that may have been

cleared.

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

Getting started

Notes

Caution

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this

unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE

plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet.

Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may

cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire

hazard.

Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or

counterclockwise to the correct position using a

straight slot screwdriver.

Voltages are as follows:

Asia model

...................................... 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

General model

........................110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

230-

240V

VOLTAGE

SELECTOR

Voltage indication

Quick start guide

5 En

INTRODUCTION

English

The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater.

In these steps, you need the following supplied

accessories.

❏ AM loop antenna

❏ Indoor FM antenna

The following items are not included in the package of this

unit.

❏ Speakers

❏ Front speakers .................................... 2

❏ Center speaker ................................... 1

❏ Surround speakers ............................. 4

Select magnetically shielded speakers. The

minimum required speakers are two front speakers.

The priority of the requirement of other speakers is

as follows:

1. Two surround speakers

2. Center speaker

3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s)

❏ Active subwoofer .................................... 1

Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA

input jack.

❏ Speaker cables ........................................ 7

❏ Subwoofer cable ..................................... 1

Select a monaural RCA cable.

❏ DVD player ............................................... 1

Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital

audio output jack and composite video output

jack.

❏ Video monitor........................................... 1

Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector

equipped with a composite video input jack.

❏ Video cable .............................................. 1

Select an RCA composite video cable.

❏ Digital coaxial audio cable ..................... 1

Quick start guide

Front right

speaker

Subwoofer

Surround back

right speaker

Surround left

speaker

Front left

speaker

Surround back left

speaker

Surround right

speaker

Center

speaker

Video monitor

DVD player

Enjoy DVD playback!

Step 1: Set up your speakers

☞

P. 6

Step 2: Connect your DVD player

and other components

Step 3: Turn on the power and

press SCENE 1 button

☞

P. 7

☞

P. 9

Preparation: Check the items

Quick start guide

6 En

Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this

unit.

1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the

room.

2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker.

Be sure to connect the “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.

Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a

stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.)

cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker.

Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

3 Connect each speaker cable to the

corresponding speaker terminal of this unit.

1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are

unplugged from the AC wall outlets.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables

together to prevent short circuits.

3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other.

4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal

part of this unit.

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel

(R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.

Front speakers and center speaker

Surround and surround back speakers

5 Connect the subwoofer cable to the

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack of this unit and

the input jack of the subwoofer.

Step 1: Set up your speakers

A B

PHONO CD (PLAY)

IN OUT

(REC)

DVD

DVD DTV/CBL

CD DVD

MD/CD-RMD/CD-R

DTV/CBL

DVR

DVD

MONITOR OUT

DVR

DVD

IN OUT IN OUT

DTV/CBL

DVR

VCR

MONITOR

OUT

MD/

CD-R

OUTIN

VCR

SB(8CH)

FRONT(6CH)

SINGLE

CENTER CENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

OUT

SURROUND

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

MULTI CH

INPUT

ZONE 2

PRE OUT

VIDEO

OUTIN

GND

FRONT B/ZONE2/

FRONT A

CENTER

SURROUND

PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

TRIGGER

COMPONENT VIDEO

AC OUTL ETS

SPEAKERS

HDMI

AUDIO

ANTENNA

GND

UNBAL

DIGITAL INPUT

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

DOCK

OUT

REMOTE

+12V

15mA MAX.

OUT

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP

SINGLE

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DTV/CBL OUTIN2

1 2 3 4 5 6

L L

R R

DVD IN1

12 3 4

To the front left

speaker

To the front right

speaker

Center speaker

Loosen Insert Tighten

To the surround

right speaker

To the

surround back

left speaker

To the surround

left speaker

To the surround

back right speaker

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT jack

Subwoofer cable

Input jack

AV receiverSubwoofer

Quick start guide

7 En

INTRODUCTION

English

1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the

digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD

player and the DVD COAXIAL jack of this

unit.

2 Connect the video cable to the composite

video output jack of your DVD player and

DVD VIDEO jack of this unit.

3 Connect the video cable to the VIDEO

MONITOR OUT jack of this unit and the video

input jack of your video monitor.

Step 2: Connect your DVD player

and other components

A B

PHONO CD (PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DVD

DVD DTV/CBL

CD DVD

MD/CD-RMD/CD-R

DTV/CBL

DVR

DVD

MONITOR OUT

DVR

DVD

IN OUT IN OUT

DTV/CBL

DVR

VCR

MONITOR

OUT

MD/

CD-R

OUTIN

VCR

SB(8CH)

FRONT(6CH)

SINGLE

CENTER CENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

OUT

SURROUND

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

MULTI CH

INPUT

ZONE 2

PRE OUT

VIDEO

OUTIN

GND

FRONT B/ZONE2/

FRONT A

CENTER

SURROUND

PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

TRIGGER

COMPONENT VIDEO

AC OUTL ETS

SPEAKERS

HDMI

AUDIO

ANTENNA

GND

UNBAL

DIGITAL INPUT

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

DOCK

OUT

REMOTE

+12V

15mA MAX.

OUT

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP

SINGLE

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DTV/CBL OUTIN2

1 2 3 4 5 6

L L

R R

DVD IN1

Make sure that this unit and the DVD

player are unplugged from the AC

wall outlets.

Digital coaxial

audio output

jack

Digital coaxial audio

cable

DVD DIGITAL INPUT

coaxial jack

DVD player

AV receiver

Composite video

output jack

Video cable

DVD VIDEO jack

DVD player

AV receiver

Video monitor

AV receiver

Video cable

VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack

Video

input jack

Quick start guide

8 En

4 Connect the supplied AM loop antenna and

indoor FM antenna to this unit.

See page 24 for the connection information.

The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity and

you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND terminal

Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna

5 Connect the power plug of this unit and other

components into the AC wall outlet.

This unit is equipped with AC OUTLET(S) for the power supply

of the other components (except Korea model). See page 24 for

details.

The type of the power plug is different depending on the models.

Note

Indoor FM antenna

AM loop antenna

Open the lever

Insert

Close the lever

■ For further connections

• Using the other kind of speaker

combinations

☞ P. 12

• Connecting a video monitor via various

ways of the connection

☞ P. 18

• Connecting a DVD player via various ways

of the connection

☞ P. 19

• Connecting a DVD recorder or a digital

video recorder

☞ P. 20

• Connecting a set-top box

☞ P. 20

• Connecting a CD player, an MD recorder or

a turntable

☞ P. 21

• Connecting an external amplifier

☞ P. 22

• Connecting a DVD player via analog multi-

channel audio connection

☞ P. 22

• Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock

☞ P. 23

• Using the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

☞ P. 23

• Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front

panel

☞ P. 23

• Connecting an outdoor FM/AM antenna

☞ P. 24

Quick start guide

9 En

INTRODUCTION

English

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press

MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON

position on the front panel.

3 Press

SCENE1 button.

“DVD Movie Viewing” appears in the front panel

display, and this unit automatically optimize own

status for the DVD playback.

The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while

this unit is in the SCENE mode.

4 Start playback of the desired DVD on your

player.

If the connected DVD player is a Yamaha product and has

capability of the SCENE control signals with the REMOTE

OUT jack of this unit (see page 23), this unit can

automatically activate the DVD player and start playback

when you press the

SCENE1 button. Refer to the

instruction manual of the DVD player for further

information.

5 Rotate

VOLUME to adjust the volume.

When you change the input source or sound field program,

the SCENE mode is deactivated, and the indicator on the

selected SCENE button turns off.

■ Using the other SCENE buttons

In the following cases, try pressing the corresponding

SCENE button to enjoy the playback of the desired

sources.

Case A: “I want to listen to a music disc from the

connected DVD player...”

Press

SCENE2 (or

SCENE2) to select “Music

Disc Listening”.

Case B: “I want to watch a TV program...”

Press

SCENE3 (or

SCENE3) to select “TV

Viewing”.

Case C: “I want to listen to a music program of the

FM/AM radio station...”

Press

SCENE4 (or

SCENE4) to select “Radio

Listening”.

Step 3: Turn on the power and

press SCENE 1 button

Check the type of the connected speakers.

If the speakers are 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to

“6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 25). 4 ohm

speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see

page 99).

Note

Quick start guide

10 En

• To use the “TV Viewing” template (Case B), you must connect

a satellite receiver, a cable TV receiver or an HDTV decoder to

this unit in advance. See page 20 for details.

• To use the “Radio Listening” template (Case C), you have to

tune into the desired radio station. See pages 50 to 52 for the

tuning information.

• To achieve the best possible reception, orient the connected AM

loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the indoor FM

antenna.

If you cannot find the desired situation, you can select and change

the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE buttons. See

page 33 for details.

■ After using this unit...

Press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this unit to

the standby mode.

This unit is set to the standby mode and consumes a small

amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from

the remote control. To turn on this unit from the standby

mode, press the desired

SCENE buttons (or

SCENE) or

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front

panel (or

POWER on the remote control). See page 25

for details.

Notes

What do you want to do with this

unit?

■ Customizing the SCENE templates

• Using various SCENE templates

☞ P. 33

• Creating your original SCENE templates

☞ P. 36

■ Using various input sources

• Basic controls of this unit

☞ P. 37

• Enjoying FM/AM radio programs

☞ P. 50

• Using your iPod with this unit

☞ P. 56

■ Using various sound features

• Using various sound field programs

☞ P. 42

• Using the pure direct mode for high fidelity

sound

☞ P. 48

• Customizing the sound field programs

☞ P. 59

■ Adjusting the parameters of this unit

• Automatically optimizing the speaker

parameters for your listening room

(AUTO SETUP)

☞ P. 28

• Manually adjusting various parameters of

this unit manually

☞ P. 69

• Setting the remote control

☞ P. 82

• Adjusting the advanced parameters

☞ P. 98

■ Additional features

Automatically turning off this unit

☞ P. 41

CONNECTIONS

11 En

PREPARATION

English

Connections

Rear panel

A B

PHONO CD (PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DVD

DVD DTV/CBL

CD DVD

MD/CD-RMD/CD-R

DTV/CBL

DVR

DVD

MONITOR OUT

DVR

DVD

IN OUT IN OUT

DTV/CBL

DVR

VCR

MONITOR

OUT

MD/

CD-R

OUTIN

VCR

SB(8CH)

FRONT(6CH)

SINGLE

CENTER CENTER

S VIDEO

VIDEO

OUT

SURROUND

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

MULTI CH

INPUT

ZONE 2

PRE OUT

VIDEO

OUTIN

GND

FRONT B/ZONE2/

FRONT A

CENTER

SURROUND

PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

TRIGGER

COMPONENT VIDEO

AC OUTLETS

SPEAKERS

HDMI

AUDIO

ANTENNA

GND

UNBAL

DIGITAL INPUT

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

DOCK

OUT

REMOTE

+12V

15mA MAX.

OUT

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP

SINGLE

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DTV/CBL OUTIN2

1 2 3 4 5 6

L L

R R

DVD IN1

TRIGGER

ANTENNA

GND

UNBAL

REMOTE

+12V

15mA MAX.

OUT

DOCK terminal

Connect a Yamaha iPod

universal dock

(sold separately).

☞ P. 23

AUDIO jacks

Connect the analog audio

cable plugs.

☞ P. 18-21

MULTI CH INPUT jacks

Connect the input source component

equipped with the multi-channel

output jacks.

☞ P. 22

ZONE 2 OUT jacks

Connect the amplifier in Zone 2.

☞ P. 95

PRE OUT jacks

Connect external amplifiers and an

active subwoofer.

☞ P. 22

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models

only)

☞ P. 4

HDMI connectors

Connect the HDMI components.

☞ P. 16

TRIGGER OUT

Outputs the control signals to external

components.

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

Connect the remote control

input and output jacks of the

Yamaha components.

☞ P. 23

Speaker terminals

Connect the speakers.

☞ P. 13

Video jacks

Connect the video cable

plugs.

☞ P. 18-20

AC OUTLET(S)

☞ P. 24

ANTENNA terminals

Connect the FM and AM

antenna.

☞ P. 24

DIGITAL INPUT/

OUTPUT jacks

Connect the digital audio

cable plugs.

☞ P. 19-21

12 En

Connections

The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-

channel audio sources.

Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the

ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same.

Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a

center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.

Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds.

Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and SBR)

The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions.

Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR)

The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the sound field

programs (see page 42). To use the presence speakers, connect the speakers to EXTRA SP terminals and then set “EXTRA

SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE” (see pages 29 and 70).

Subwoofer (SW)

The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is

effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction

of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is

not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front

speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.

Placing speakers

60˚

30˚

SBR

SBL

80˚

30 cm (12 in) or more

SBR

SBL

1.8 m (6 ft)

PRPL

1.8 m (6 ft)

0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)

1.8 m (6 ft)

13 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,

this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe,

groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable

to the “–” (black) terminals.

Connecting speakers

Caution

• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 25).

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage

this unit and/or the speakers. If the speaker wires are short-circuited, “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front

panel display.

• Use the magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the

speakers away from the monitor.

• If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 25). 4 ohm

speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 99).

Note

SUB

WOOFER

PRE OUT

FRONT B/ZONE2/

FRONT A

CENTER

SURROUND

PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

SPEAKERS

SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP

SINGLE

L L

R R

Front speakers

(FRONT A)

Surround speakers

Subwoofer

Right

Center speaker

Surround back speakers

When you use single surround back speaker, connect the

speaker to the left SURROUND BACK terminal (SINGLE).

Left

Right

EXTRA SP terminals

Connect the alternative front speaker system (FRONT B), presence speakers or

Zone 2 speakers. To select the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA

SP terminals, set the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see

page 70).

You can also select the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP

terminals in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 29).

14 En

Connections

■ Connecting the speaker cable

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of

insulation from the end of each speaker

cable and then twist the exposed wires of the

cable together to prevent short circuits.

2 Loosen the knob.

3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side

of each terminal.

4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

■ Connecting the banana plug

(except Europe, Asia and Korea models)

Tighten the knob and then insert the banana

plug connector into the end of the

corresponding terminal.

■ Using bi-amplification connections

This unit allows you to make bi-amplification connections

to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support bi-

amplification.

To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT

and SURROUND BACK terminals as shown below. To

activate the bi-amplification connections, set “BI-AMP”

to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see page 101).

When you make the conventional connection, make sure that the

shorting bars are put into the terminals appropriately. Refer to the

instruction manuals of the speakers for details.

10 mm (0.4 in)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Caution

Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the

LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter)

crossovers.

Note

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

FRONT A

SURROUND BACK/

BI-AMP

SINGLE

This unit

Left

Right

Front speakers

15 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Audio jacks

This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other

components.

AUDIO jacks

For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left

and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the

right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.

DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital

audio cables.

DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital

audio cables.

• You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the

COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals

input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are

compatible with digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling

frequency.

• Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the

fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not

using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This

cap protects the jack from dust.

■ Video jacks

This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of input jacks on your video

monitor.

VIDEO jacks

For conventional composite video signals transmitted via

composite video cables.

S VIDEO jacks

For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and

chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate

wires of S-video cables.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component video signals, separated into the

luminance (Y) and chrominance (P

B, PR) video signals

transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.

This unit is equipped with the video conversion function. See

pages 17 and 79 for details.

Information on jacks and cable plugs

VIDEO S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y R PB P

COAXIAL

DIGITAL

AUDIO

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

Left and right

analog audio

cable plugs

Optical

digital

audio cable

plug

Coaxial

digital audio

cable plug

Composite

video cable

plug

S-video

cable plug

Component

video cable

plugs

Audio jacks and cable plugs Video jacks and cable plugs

(Red)(White) (Orange) (Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red)

Notes

16 En

Connections

■ HDMI compatibility with this unit

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video

and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of

the DVD player.

• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or

DVI components.

• You can check the potential problem about the HDMI

connection (see page 41).

■ HDMI jack and cable plug

• We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters

(16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.

• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack

↔ DVI-D jack) to connect

this unit to other DVI components.

• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of

the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of

this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt

playback or cause noise.

• Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or

HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit cannot be digitally output at the

HDMI OUT jack.

• If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the

HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to

establish the connection to the component.

Information on HDMI™

Audio signal

types

Audio signal

formats

Compatible

HDMI

components

2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

CD, DVD-Video,

DVD-Audio, etc.

Multi-ch Linear

PCM

8ch, 32-192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, etc.

DSD 2/5.1ch,

2.8224 MHz, 1 bit

SACD, etc.

Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc.

This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following

standards:

• HDMI Version 1.2a (High-Definition Multimedia

Interface Specification Version 1.2a) licensed by

HDMI Licensing, LLC.

• HDCP Revision 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital

Content Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed

by Digital Content Protection, LLC.

Notes

HDMI

HDMI cable plug

17 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Audio signal flow

• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack can be

output at the HDMI OUT jack only when “SUPPORT AUDIO”

is set to “OTHER” (see page 75).

• Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the

AUDIO output and DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.

■ Video signal flow

• When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT

VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the

input signals is as follows:

1. COMPONENT VIDEO

2. S VIDEO

3. VIDEO

• Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2

jack cannot be output from analog video output jacks.

• This unit does not accept analog component video signals with

1080p of resolution.

• The OSD signal is not output at the VCR OUT, DVR OUT and

HDMI MONITOR OUT jacks and is not recorded.

• This unit does not deinterlace any analog video signals.

Audio and video signal flow

Notes

DIGITAL AUDIO

(OPTICAL)

DIGITAL AUDIO

(COAXIAL)

HDMI

AUDIO

OutputInput

Analog output

Digital output

Notes

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

Through

OutputInput

Video conversion ON (see page 79)

18 En

Connections

Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack,

the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S

VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR

OUT jack of this unit.

You can choose to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or

on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack

of this unit. Use the “SUPPORT AUDIO” parameter in “SOUND

MENU” to select the component to play back HDMI audio

signals (see page 75).

• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI

connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals

being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the

HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.

• When you connect your TV monitor or projector via HDMI

connection, the OSD does not appear. In such cases, connect the

TV monitor or projector via component, S-video or video

connection.

• Connect the input source components to the HDMI IN 1 or

HDMI IN 2 jack to display the video images on the video

monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack.

Connecting a TV monitor or projector

Make sure that this unit and other

components are unplugged from the

AC wall outlets.

Notes

MONITOR OUT

MONITOR

OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

PR PB

TV (or projector)

Video in

Component video in

S-video in

HDMI in

indicates recommended connections

indicates alternative connections

19 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 79), be sure

to make the same type of video connections as those made for

your TV (see page 18). For example, if you connected your TV

to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your

other components to the VIDEO jacks.

• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 79), the

converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT

jacks. To record a source, make the same type of video

connections between each component.

• To make a digital connection to a component other than the

default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or

DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for

“OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O

ASSIGNMENT” (see page 76).

• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT

(OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks,

priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT

(COAXIAL) jack.

■ Connecting a DVD player

Connecting other components

Notes

Make sure that this unit and other

components are unplugged from the

AC wall outlets.

DVD

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

AUDIO

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DVD IN1

PR PB Y

DVD player

HDMI out

Component video out

S-video out

Video out

Optical out

Audio out

indicates recommended connections

indicates alternative connections

Coaxial out

20 En

Connections

■ Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR

■ Connecting a set-top box

DVR

IN OUT IN OUT

DVR

VCR

OUTIN

VCR

S VIDEO

VIDEO

OUTIN

COMPONENT VIDEO

AUDIO

PR PB Y

S-video in

S-video out

Video out

Audio out

DVD recorder, PVR or VCR

S-video in

Video out

Audio out

Audio in

Video in

Component

video out

DVD recorder, PVR

Audio in

Video in

S-video out

DTV/CBL

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

HDMI

AUDIO

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

DTV/CBL IN2

L R

PR PB Y

Satellite receiver, cable TV

receiver or HDTV decoder

HDMI out

Component video out

Audio out

S-video out

Video out

Optical out

21 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Connecting audio components

• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each the DIGITAL INPUT jack or the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O

ASSIGNMENT” (see page 76).

• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the

connection to the GND terminal for some turntables.

• The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-

output MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier.

• When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jack and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack to an audio component,

the priority is given to the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.

Notes

PHONO CD (PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

MD/CD-RMD/CD-R

MD/

CD-R

GND

AUDIO

DIGITAL INPUT

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

COAXIAL

1 25

R L

Turntable

CD recorder, MD

recorder or tape deck

Audio in

Optical in

Audio out

Ground

indicates recommended connections

indicates alternative connections

CD player

Audio out

Optical out

Coaxial out

22 En

Connections

■ Connecting an external amplifier

This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However, if you want to add more power to the speaker output

or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks.

• When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make connections to the SPEAKERS terminals.

• The signals output at the FRONT PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings (see page 48).

• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer (see page 48).

• Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the settings for “SPEAKER SET” (see page 70)

and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70).

1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks

Front channel output jacks.

2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks

Surround channel output jacks.

3 SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks

Surround back channel output jacks. When you only

connect one external amplifier for the surround back

channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack.

• When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, this unit outputs the front

channel audio signals at the SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks.

• The audio signals output at the SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks

differ depending on the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” setting (see

page 70).

4 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack

Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier.

5 CENTER PRE OUT jack

Center channel output jack.

■ Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and

SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-

amplifier.

If you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 78), you can use the input jacks assigned as “FRONT”

in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 78) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals.

Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to

match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.

• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38), this unit automatically

turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs.

• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that

you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.

The analog audio input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in

“MULTI CH SET” (see page 78).

Notes

SINGLE

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

PRE OUT

Notes

SB(8CH)

FRONT(6CH)

CENTER

SURROUND

SUB

WOOFER

MULTI CH

INPUT

L R LR

Subwoofer

out

Multi-format player/External

decoder (5.1-channel output)

Center out

Surround out

Front out

SB(8CH)

FRONT(6CH)

CENTER

SURROUND

SUB

WOOFER

MULTI CH

INPUT

L R LRL R

Multi-format player/External

decoder (7.1-channel output)

Front out

Subwoofer

out

Center out

Surround back out

Surround out

23 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal

dock

This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear

panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal

dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) where you can

station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using

the supplied remote control. Connect a Yamaha iPod

universal dock to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of

this unit using its dedicated cable.

■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

When the components are the Yamaha products and have

the capability of the transmission of the remote control

signals, connect the REMOTE IN jack and REMOTE

OUT jack to the remote control input and output jack with

the monaural analog mini cable as follows.

• If the components have the capability of the SCENE control

signals, this unit can automatically activate the corresponding

components and start the playback when you use one of the

SCENE buttons. Refer to the owner’s manuals for details about

the capability of the SCENE control signals of the components.

• Connect the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit and the remote

control input jack of the components to control the components

by using the SCENE feature.

• If the component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack is not

the Yamaha product, set “SCENE IR” in the advanced setup

menu to “OFF” (see page 101).

Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a

game console or a video camera to this unit.

• The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel

take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.

• To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select

“V-AUX” as the input source.

DOCK

Yamaha iPod universal dock

(such as the YDS-10, sold

separately)

REMOTE

OUT

Yamaha

component

Remote

control out

Remote

control in

Infrared signal

receiver or

Yamaha

component

Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the

front panel

Caution

Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other

components before making connections.

Notes

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

PHONES

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

SPEAKERS

PRESET/TUNING

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING MEMORY

TUNING

ON/OFF

CONTROL

AUTO/MA N'L

ZONE 2

ZONE

EDIT

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

SCENE

AUDIO SELECT

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

VOLUM E

OPTIMIZER MIC

S VIDEO

VIDEO AUDIO

OPTICAL

EFFECT

SILENT CINEMA

OFF

OPTICAL

AUDIO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

Game console or

video camera

Optical

output

Video

output

S-Video

output

Audio

output

24 En

Connections

Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this

unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated

terminals. In general, these antennas should provide

sufficient signal strength.

See page 8 for connection information of the supplied indoor FM

antenna and AM loop antenna.

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception

than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,

install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.

■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

U.K. and Australia models..................................... 1 outlet

Korea model............................................................... None

Other models......................................................... 2 outlets

Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected

components. Connect the power cable of your other

components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is

supplied when the main zone or Zone 2 is turned on.

However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when the main

zone and Zone 2 are turned off or when

MASTER ON/

OFF on the front panel is pressed and released outward to

the OFF position. For information on the maximum power

or the total power consumption of the components that can

be connected to these outlet(s), see “Specifications” on

page 114.

Connecting the FM and AM

antennas

Notes

ANTENNA

GND

Indoor FM

antenna

(supplied)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the

antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth

ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth.

AM loop

antenna

(supplied)

Outdoor AM antenna

Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33

ft) vinyl-covered wire

extended outdoors from a

window.

Connecting the power cable

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, the stored data will be lost in case the power

cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the

power supply is cut off for more than one week.

AC OUTLETS

To the AC wall outlet

25 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

1 Make sure this unit is turned off.

Refer to the right column for details.

2 Press and hold

TONE CONTROL on the

front panel and then press

MASTER ON/

OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this

unit.

This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu

appears in the front panel display.

3 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector on the

front panel to select “SP IMP.”.

“SP IMP.” and the current speaker impedance setting

(“8Ω MIN”) appear in the front panel display.

4 Press

TONE CONTROL on the front

panel repeatedly to select “6Ω MIN”.

5 Press

MASTER ON/OFF on the front

panel to release it outward to the OFF

position to save the new setting and turn off

this unit.

The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this

unit.

■ Turning on this unit

Press

MASTER ON/OFF

on the front panel

inward to the ON position to turn on this

unit.

When you turn on this unit by pressing

MASTER ON/

OFF, the main zone is turned on.

When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay

before this unit can reproduce sound.

■ Turning off this unit

Press

MASTER ON/OFF

on the front panel

again to release it outward to the OFF

position to turn off this unit.

•

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as

POWER and

STANDBY on the remote control are

operational only when

MASTER ON/OFF is pressed

inward to the ON position.

• As usual, we recommend using the standby mode to turn off this

unit.

■ Set the main zone to the standby mode

Press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF

(or

STANDBY) to set the main zone to the

standby mode.

In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of

power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote

control.

■ Turning on the main zone from the

standby mode

Press

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF

(or

POWER

)

to turn on the main zone.

• You can also turn on the main zone by pressing

SCENE (or

SCENE) buttons.

• When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay

before this unit can reproduce sound.

• These buttons are operational only when

MASTER ON/

OFF is pressed inward to the ON position.

Setting the speaker impedance

Caution

If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to

“6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 4 ohm

speakers can be also used as the front speakers.

Note

TONE CONTROL

MASTER

OFF

While holding

down

Turning this unit on and off

Notes

26 En

Connections

1B Input signal indicators

Lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (Direct

Stream Digital) or PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital

audio signals.

2C Decoder indicators

The respective indicator lights up when any of the

decoders of this unit function.

3 ENHANCER indicator

Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is

selected (see page 46).

4 HDMI indicator

Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is

input at HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jacks (see page 16).

5 SILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound

field program is selected (see page 46).

6 DOCK indicator

Lights up when you station your iPod in a Yamaha iPod

universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately)

connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 23)

and V-AUX is selected as the input source. The DOCK

indicator also lights up when this unit is charging the

battery of the stationed iPod in the standby mode.

7 Input source indicators

The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently

selected input source.

8 YPAO indicator

Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the

speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without

any modifications (see page 28).

9 Tuner indicators

Lights up when this unit is in the FM or AM tuning mode

(see pages 50 to 52).

0 MUTE indicator

Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 40).

A VOLUME level indicator

Indicates the current volume level.

D Sound field indicators

Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields.

E VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see

page 46).

F Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 40).

G SP A B indicators

Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.

H ZONE2 indicator

Lights up when Zone 2 is turned on (see page 96).

I NIGHT indicator

Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see

page 49).

J DSP indicators

The respective indicator lights up when any of the DSP

sound field programs are selected (see page 42).

K Multi-information display

Shows the name of the current sound field program and

other information when adjusting or changing settings.

Front panel display

VCR DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER PHONO

q PL

q EX

q PL

ENHANCER

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA

ZONE2 NIGHT

DOCK

AUTO

YPAO

PSHOLD RT

EON

PTYPTY

TUNED

MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q PL x

DSD

A B

96/24

HiFi DSP

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

DIGITAL

STEREO

FB C E H I MLK

NJD

4 65 8 9 A2 3 0

L ........ Europe model only

27 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

L Radio Data System indicators

(Europe model only)

PS, PTY, RT and CT

Light up according to the selected Radio Data System

display mode.

EON

Lights up when the EON data service is being

received.

PTY HOLD

Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System

stations in the PTY SEEK mode.

M SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 41).

N 96/24 indicator

Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.

O Input channel and speaker indicators

LFE indicator

Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE

signal.

Input channel indicators

Indicate the channel components of the current digital

input signal.

Presence and surround back speaker

indicators

Light up according to the number of presence and

surround back speakers set for “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”

(see page 70) and “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 71) in

“SOUND MENU” when this unit is in the auto setup

(see page 28) or the speaker level setting in “SOUND

MENU” (see page 72) procedure.

• You can make settings for surround back speakers automatically

by running “AUTO SETUP” (see page 28) or manually by

adjusting settings for “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 71) in

“SOUND MENU”.

• To use the presence speakers, set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to

“PRESENCE” (see page 29 or 70).

The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on this unit during operation.

Infrared window (

)

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

Transmit indicator (

)

Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared

signals.

Display window (

)

Shows the name of the selected input source that you can

control.

Operation mode selector (

)

The function of some buttons depends on the operation

mode selector position.

AMP

Operates the amplifier function of this unit.

SOURCE

Operates the component selected with an input

selector button (see page 84).

Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or

PHONO (see page 83).

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types

of conditions:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove

– places of extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

• To set the remote control codes for other components, see

page 85.

Presence speaker indicators

Input channel indicators

Surround back speaker indicators

L CR

SL SB SR

LFE

LFE indicator

Using the remote control

Notes

30 30

Approximately 6 m (20 ft)

Remote control sensor

OPTIMIZING THE SPEAKER SETTING FOR YOUR LISTENING ROOM

28 En

This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid

troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied

optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening

environment.

• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output

during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.

• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as

possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If

there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be

satisfactory.

• You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that

appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual

uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP”

procedure.

• Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector

on the remote control to

AMP.

• This unit uses the speakers connected to the FRONT A speaker

terminals as the front speakers for the adjustment.

1 Make sure of the following check points

before starting the AUTO SETUP operations.

❏ Speakers are connected appropriately.

❏ Headphones are disconnected from this unit.

❏ This unit and the video monitor are turned on.

❏ The connected subwoofer is turned on and the

volume level is set to about half way (or slightly

less).

❏ The crossover frequency controls of the

connected subwoofer is set to the maximum.

❏ The room is sufficiently quiet.

2 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

The following menu screen appears on the video

monitor.

3 Place the optimizer microphone at your

normal listening position on a flat level

surface with the omni-directional

microphone heading upward.

It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the

optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be

when you are seated in your listening position. You can use the

attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer microphone

to the tripod (etc.).

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

Using AUTO SETUP

Notes

VIDEO AUX

OPTIMIZER MIC

S VIDEO

VIDEO AUDIO

OPTICAL

Omni-directional

microphone

AUTO:MENU

PRESENCENONE

. EXTRASPASSIGN

ZONE2 >FRONTB



SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO

EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL

START

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[]/[]:Select

[

Optimizer microphone

29 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

PREPARATION

English

4 Press

l / h to select the desired setting

for “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” and then press

Extra speaker assignment

EXTRA SP ASSIGN

Selects the function of the speakers connected to the

EXTRA SP terminals.

Choices: FRONT B, ZONE2, PRESENCE, NONE

• When you use the alternative front speaker

system (see page 38)

Select “FRONT B”.

• When you use the Zone 2 speakers (see

page 96)

Select “ZONE2” to set the function of the speakers

to the Zone 2 speakers. This unit drives the Zone 2

speakers by using the internal amplifier.

• When you use the presence speakers (see

page 12)

Select “PRESENCE” to set the function of the

speakers to the presence speakers.

• When you do not use the EXTRA SP

terminals

Select “NONE” to deactivate the EXTRA SP

terminals.

If you select “ON” in “BI-AMP” (see page 101), you cannot

select “PRESENCE” or “ZONE2” in “EXTRA SP

ASSIGN”.

5 Press

l / h to select “SETUP”.

Choices: AUTO, RELOAD, UNDO, DEFAULT

• Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire

“AUTO SETUP” procedure.

• Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO

SETUP” settings and override the previous

settings.

• Select “UNDO” to undo the last “AUTO SETUP”

settings and restore the previous settings.

• Select “DEFAULT” to reset the “AUTO SETUP”

parameters to the initial factory settings.

• “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is available only when you have

previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results.

• “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is not available when you change

the setting of “BI-AMP” in the advanced setup (see

page 101) or “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SOUND MENU”

(see page 70).

6 Press

l / h to select the desired setting of

“EQ” and then press

Parametric equalizer type EQ

Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the specified

frequency bands. This unit automatically selects the

crucial frequency bands for the listening room and

adjusts the level of the selected frequency bands to

create a cohesive sound field in the room. You can

select the type of the parametric equalizer adjustment

from the following choices.

Choices: NATURAL, FLAT, FRONT

• Select “NATURAL” to average out the frequency

response of all speakers with higher frequencies

being less emphasized. Recommended if the FLAT

setting sounds a little harsh.

• Select “FLAT” to average the frequency response

of all speakers. Recommended if all of your

speakers are of similar quality.

• Select “FRONT” to adjust the frequency response

of each speaker in accordance with the sound of

your front speakers. Recommended if your front

speakers are of much higher quality than your other

speakers.

7 Press

n to select “START” and then press

ENTER to start the setup procedure.

This unit starts the auto setup procedure. Loud test

tones are output from each speaker during the auto

setup procedure. Once all items are set, the

“AUTO:RESULT” display appears in the OSD.

• During the auto setup procedure, do not perform any

operation on this unit.

• We recommend getting out of the room while this unit is in

the auto setup procedure. It takes approximately 3 minutes

for this unit to complete the auto setup procedure.

Note

Notes

30 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

This unit performs the following checks:

Speaker wiring WIRING

Checks which speakers are connected and the

polarity of each speaker.

Speaker size SIZE

Checks the frequency response of each speaker and

sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each

channel.

Speaker distance DISTANCE

Checks the distance of each speaker from the

listening position and adjusts the timing of each

channel.

Equalizing EQUALIZING

Checks and adjusts the tonal characteristics of all the

speakers by the setting of “EQ”.

Speaker level LEVEL

Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker.

The display changes as follows.

The results displayed under “RESULT” are as

follows.

Number of speakers SP

Displays the number of speakers connected to this

unit in the following order:

Front/Back/Subwoofer

Speaker distance DIST

Displays the speaker distance from the listening

position in the following order:

Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance

Speaker level LVL

Displays the speaker output level in the following

order:

Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output

level

• If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing

procedure, restart from step 4.

• If you selected “RELOAD” in step 4, no test tones are

output.

• If an error occurs during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure,

the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen

appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on

page 32.

• When this unit detects potential problems during the

“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” and the

number of warning messages appears in the above of

“RESULT” (see page 32).

• Depending on the listening environment, “SWFR

PHASE:REV” appears during the “AUTO:CHECK”

procedure and “SUBWOOFER PHASE” in “SOUND

MENU” (see page 72) is automatically set to

“REVERSE”.

8 Press

ENTER to display the setup results

in detail.

AUTO:MENU

PRESENCENONE

EXTRASPASSIGN

ZONE2 >FRONTB



SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO

EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL

. START

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[]/[]:Select

[

AUTO:RESULT

. RESULT

SP : 3/4/0.1

DIST: 4.50/5.30m

LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB

SET CANCEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

AUTO:CHECK

INITIALIZING

. WIRING

SIZE/DISTANCE

EQUALIZING

LEVEL

CHECKCH=CENTER

|||||;;;;;;;;

[]:Exit

[

Notes

AUTO:RESULT

. RESULT

SP : 3/4/0.1

DIST: 4.50/5.30m

LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB

SET CANCEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

RESULT:WIRING

FRONT L;;;;;;;OK

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

[

31 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

PREPARATION

English

9 Press

l / h repeatedly to toggle between

the setup result displays.

If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually

adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see

page 67).

• The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may

be longer than the actual distance depending on the

characteristics of your subwoofer.

• In the “EQ” results, different values may be set for the

same frequency to provide finer adjustments.

10 Press

ENTER to return to the top

“AUTO:RESULT” display.

11 Make sure the pointer is pointing at “SET”

and “CANCEL” and then press

l / h to

select “SET” or “CANCEL”.

Choices: SET, CANCEL

• Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP”

results.

• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP”

results.

12 Press

ENTER to confirm your selection.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

13 Press

SET MENU to exit from “SET

MENU”.

14 Disconnect the optimizer microphone from

this unit.

The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it

away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top

of this unit.

If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of

your listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to

recalibrate your system.

Notes

Results of the speaker

connection and wiring

Results of the speaker

distance from the

listening position

Results of the setting of

each speaker size

Results of the parametric

equalizer of each speaker

Results of the speaker

output level

AUTO:RESULT

. RESULT

SP : 3/4/0.1

DIST: 4.50/5.30m

LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB

SET CANCEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

AUTO:RESULT

 RESULT

SP : 3/4/0.1

DIST: 4.50/5.30m

LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB

. SET CANCEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

.;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

.A;SIGNAL INFO

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

32 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

■ If an error screen appears

Press

k / n / l / h to select “RETRY” or

“EXIT” and then press

ENTER.

The following display is an example where “E-9:USER

CANCEL” appears in the OSD.

Choices: RETRY, EXIT

• Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP”

procedure.

• Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP”

procedure.

■ If “WARNING” appears

When this unit detects potential problems during the

“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” appears in the

“AUTO:RESULT” display. Check the warning messages

to correct your speaker settings.

Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the

“AUTO SETUP” procedure.

1 Make sure the pointer is pointing at

“WARNING” and then press

ENTER to

display the detailed information about the

warning.

The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates

the number of warning messages.

2 Press

l / h repeatedly to toggle between

the warning displays.

• For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO

SETUP” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 107.

• When the corresponding warning message is not

applicable to a speaker, “–

–” is displayed instead.

3 Press

ENTER to return to the top

“AUTO:RESULT” display.

Note

AUTO:ERROR

. E-9:USER CANCEL

Don't operate

any function.

>RETRY EXIT

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Enter

[

AUTO:RESULT

RESULT

. WARNING(3)

>SET CANCEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SP : 3/4/0.1

DIST: 4.50/5.30m

LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB

WARNING:W-1

Reverse Channel

FL --

CENTER

PL PR

SL SR

SBL SBR

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

[

SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES

33 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

This unit is equipped with 17 preset SCENE templates for

various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory

setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to

each SCENE button:

SCENE 1: DVD Movie Viewing

SCENE 2: Music Disc Listening

SCENE 3: TV Viewing

SCENE 4: Radio Listening

If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select

the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template

library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE

buttons on the front panel and the remote control.

1 Press and hold the

SCENE (or

SCENE)

button for 3 seconds.

The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the

front panel starts to flash, and the name of the

currently assigned SCENE template appears in the

front panel display.

2 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or set the

operation mode selector to

AMP and then

press

l / h) to select the desired

template.

3 Press the

SCENE (or

SCENE) button

again to confirm the selection.

The selected SCENE template is assigned to the

SCENE button.

• If you do not carry out any operation within 30 seconds

from the last operation in these steps, this procedure is

automatically canceled.

• Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the

corresponding SCENE buttons, you need to set the input

source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See

page 82 for details.

Selecting the SCENE templates

Selecting the desired SCENE

template

SCENE template library

(Image)

Select the desired SCENE

template

Assign the

SCENE

template to the

SCENE button

DVD MovieView

Remote control

Flashes

3 seconds

Front panel

Notes

DVD Viewing

Remote control

Front panel

34 En

Selecting the SCENE templates

■ Which SCENE template would you like to select?

You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 36 for details.

Radio Listening

CD Hifi Listening

CD Listening

CD Music Listening

iPod Listening

DVD Live Viewing

DVD Movie Viewing

DVD Viewing

Disc Hifi Listening

Music Disc Listening

Disc Listening

DVR Viewing

TV Viewing

Action Game Playing

RPG Playing

DVD

V-AUX

PHONO

DTV/CBL

TUNER (FM/AM)

DOCK

DVD

DVR

Video sources

(DVD video,

Recorded video)

TV programs

Video games

iPod

Radio programs

Music discs (CD,

SACD or DVD-Audio)

SCENE templates

Which component do you

like for playback?

Vinyl records

Which source do you like to

play back?

LP Record Listening

Default

SCENE buttons

TV Sports Viewing

To listening to the iPod, you need to connect a Yamaha iPod universal

dock (sold separately) to this unit (see page 56).

35 En

Selecting the SCENE templates

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Preset SCENE templates descriptions

The illustrations of the SCENE button in the following table indicate the assigned SCENE buttons as the default setting.

When the connected DVD player or CD player has the

capability of the SCENE control signals and is connected to

the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, this unit operates the

DVD player or CD player worked with the SCENE features.

You can select “V-AUX” as the input source even if your iPod

is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this

unit.

SCENE template Input source Playback mode Features

DVD Viewing

DVD

STRAIGHT

Select this SCENE template when you play back general

contents on the DVD player.

DVD Movie Viewing

DVD

MOVIE

Sci-Fi

Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on

your DVD player.

DVD Live Viewing

DVD

ENTERTAINMENT

Music Video

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the music live

video on your DVD player.

DVR Viewing

DVR MOVIE Drama

Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on

your digital video recorder.

Disc Hifi Listening

DVD

PURE DIRECT

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high

fidelity sound of the music discs on your DVD player.

Music Disc Listening

DVD

STEREO

2ch STEREO

Select this SCENE template when you play back music

discs on your DVD player.

Disc Listening

DVD

STEREO

7ch STEREO

Select this SCENE template when you play back music

sources on your DVD player as the background music.

CD Hifi Listening

PURE DIRECT

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high

fidelity sound of the music discs on your CD player.

CD Listening

STEREO

2ch STEREO

Select this SCENE template when you play back music

discs on your CD player.

CD Music Listening

STEREO

7ch STEREO

Select this SCENE template when you play back music

source on your CD player as the background music.

Radio Listening

TUNER MUSIC

ENHANCER

7ch Enhancer

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM

radio programs.

iPod Listening

DOCK (V-AUX) MUSIC

ENHANCER

7ch Enhancer

Select this SCENE template when you play back music on

your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock.

TV Viewing

DTV/CBL STRAIGHT

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy general

programs on your TV.

TV Sports Viewing

DTV/CBL ENTERTAINMENT

Sports

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports

programs on your TV.

Action Game

Playing

V-AUX*

ENTERTAINMENT

Action Game

Select this SCENE template when you play action games

such as car racing and FPS games.

RPG Playing

V-AUX*

ENTERTAINMENT

Roleplaying Game

Select this SCENE template when you play role-playing

games.

LP Record Listening

PHONO PURE DIRECT

Select this SCENE template when you play back vinyl

records on your turntable.

36 En

Selecting the SCENE templates

You can create your original SCENE templates for each

SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 17 SCENE

templates to create the original SCENE templates.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press and hold the desired

SCENE button for 3 seconds.

The SCENE template customizing screen appears on

the video monitor.

When the SCENE template you want to customize is not

assigned to any of the

SCENE buttons, press

l / h

repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template on the

menu screen.

3 Press

k / n to select the desired parameter

of the SCENE template and then

l / h to

select the desired value of the selected

parameter.

You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE

template:

• INPUT: The input source component.

• MODE: The active sound field programs,

STRAIGHT or Pure Direct mode.

• NIGHT: The night listening mode (see page 49).

− SYSTEM: Keeps the current night listening

mode.

− CINEMA: Sets the night listening mode to the

CINEMA mode.

− MUSIC: Sets the night listening mode to the

MUSIC mode.

4 Press the

SCENE button again to confirm

the edit.

An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE

template.

• Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the

corresponding

SCENE buttons, you need to set the input

source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See

page 82 for details.

• You can create a customized SCENE template for each SCENE

button, and if you create another customized SCENE template,

this unit overwrites the old customized SCENE template with

the new one.

• The newly created template is only available for the assigned

SCENE button.

■ Rename the SCENE templates

Select the name of the SCENE template at step 3

of “Creating your original SCENE templates” and

then press

ENTER.

•Press

k / n to select the desired character.

•Press

l / h to place an “_” (underscore) under the

space or the desired character.

•Press

RETURN to cancel the new name.

•Press

ENTER to confirm the new name.

Creating your original SCENE

templates

Note

SCENE template library

(Image)

Select the desired SCENE

template

Assign the SCENE

template to the

SCENE button

Create an original SCENE

template



[RETURN]:STATUS

[SCENE1]:SET

[ENTER]:Rename

NIGHT:SYSTEM



MODE:STRAIGHT

INPUT: DVD

.pDVDViewing[



SCENE1

[

Notes

PLAYBACK

37 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on

the remote control to

AMP.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

See page 40 to display the input source information.

2 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or press one

of the input selector buttons (

)) to select

the desired input source.

The name of the currently selected input source

appears in the front panel display for a few seconds.

The corresponding input selector button on the remote

control for the currently selected input source lights up for

approximately 5 seconds after you press any buttons on the

remote control, showing which source component is

currently being operated.

3 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

• Refer to the operating instructions for the source

component.

• See page 50 for details about tuning instructions.

Rotate

VOLUME

(or press

VOLUME +/–

)

to adjust the volume to the desired output

level.

• See page 48 to adjust the level of each speaker.

• This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.

• You can set the initial volume level and maximum volume

level (see page 75).

5 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector (or press

one of the sound field program selector

buttons (

) repeatedly) to select the desired

sound field program.

The name of the selected sound field program appears

in the front panel display. See page 42 for details

about sound field programs.

Sound field programs cannot be selected when the

component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is

selected as the input source (see page 38).

• Choose a sound field program based on your listening

preference, not merely on the name of the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically

selects the last sound field program used with the

corresponding input source.

• To display information about the currently selected sound

field program in the OSD, see page 59 for details.

Playback

Caution

Extreme caution should be exercised when you play

back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD

encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,

you will only hear some unwanted noise that may

damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player

supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound

output level of your CD player before you play back a

CD encoded in DTS.

To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio

connection, set “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” to

“DTS” before the playback (see page 78).

Basic procedure

INPUT:DVD

VCR DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER PHONO

Currently selected input source

Available input sources

Note

Sci-Fi

Currently selected sound field program

38 En

Playback

■ A quick guide to contents

Use this feature to select the component connected to the

MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 22) as the input

source.

Rotate the

INPUT selector to select MULTI CH

(or

MULTI CH IN).

“MULTI CH” appears in the front panel display.

Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the

parameters for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 78).

Sound field programs and the night listening mode cannot be

selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks is selected as the input source.

Use this feature to turn the front speaker system (FRONT

A and/or FRONT B) on or off.

Press

SPEAKERS on the front panel

repeatedly to turn on or off the set of front

speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or

EXTRA SP speaker terminals.

The active front speaker set changes as follows:

• FRONT A and B or FRONT B setting is not available when

“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to “PRESENCE”, “ZONE 2” or

“NONE” (see page 70).

• Turn off the volume level of this unit when you switch the front

speaker setting.

■ Using the Zone B feature

When you set “FRONT B” to “ZONE B” (see page 70),

you can use the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP

speaker terminals in another room (Zone B).

Press

SPEAKERS on the front panel

repeatedly to turn on or off the Zone B speakers.

When you activate the Zone B speakers, all the speakers in

the main room are muted.

• You cannot activate both the main room and Zone B speakers

simultaneously.

• If you select CINEMA DSP sound field program and activate

the Zone B speakers, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates

automatically (see page 46).

When you want to...

See

page

Enjoy pure hi-fi stereo sound 48

Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 48

Adjust the parameters of sound field programs 59

Enjoy sources with a wide dynamic range at night 49

Use headphones 40

Enjoy multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo 49

Select a decoder to play back sources with 64

Automatically set this unit to the standby mode 41

Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT

component

Note

Selecting the front speaker set

Notes

FRONT A

FRONT B

FRONT A

and

FRONT B

OFF

39 En

Playback

BASIC

OPERATION

English

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this

feature (audio input jack select) to switch between input

jacks when more than one input jack is assigned to as the

same input source.

• We recommend setting the audio input jack select to “AUTO”

in most cases.

• You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by

using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 80).

Press

AUDIO SELECT (or

AUDIO)

repeatedly to select the desired audio input jack

select setting.

This feature is not available when no digital input jacks

(OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. Use “I/O

ASSIGNMENT” in “INPUT MENU” to reassign the respective

input jack (see page 76).

You can display the operating information of this unit on a

video monitor.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

DISPLAY on the remote

control.

The current status screen appears in the OSD.

You can select the amount of time that the current status is

displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP” parameter

in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79).

The OSD signal is not output at the VIDEO output jacks

and will not be recorded.

Selecting audio input jacks

(AUDIO SELECT)

AUTO

Automatically selects input signals in the

following order: (1) HDMI (2) Digital

signals (3) Analog signals

HDMI

Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI

signals are not input, no sound is output.

COAX/OPT

Automatically selects input signals in the

following order: (1) Digital signals input

at the COAXIAL jack. (2) Digital signals

input at the OPTICAL jack. When no

signals are input, no sound is output.

ANALOG

Selects only analog signals. If no analog

signals are input, no sound is output.

Note

A.SEL:AUTO

VCR DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER PHONO

Currently selected audio input jack select setting

Available input sources

Displaying the current status of

this unit on a video monitor

Note



NIGHT:OFF



A.SEL:HDMI

INPUT:DVD



Sci-Fi

MOVIE

STATUSVOL:-40.0dB

40 En

Playback

Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo

analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on

the front panel.

When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode

activates automatically (see page 46).

• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the

speaker terminals.

• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the

left and right headphone channels.

Press

MUTE on the remote control to mute the

audio output. Press

MUTE again to resume

the audio output.

• You can also rotate

VOLUME on the front panel or press

VOLUME +/– to resume the audio output.

• You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTE TYPE”

parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 74).

• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the

audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel

display when the audio output is resumed.

You can combine a video image from a video source with

sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy

listening to classical music while viewing beautiful

scenery from the video source on the video monitor.

Press the input selector buttons (

) on the

remote control to select a video source and then

an audio source.

Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH SET” menu to the

desired setting to select the default background video input source

of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 78).

You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,

bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

SET MENU on the remote

control.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

2 Press

n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL

INFO” and then press

ENTER.

The audio information about the input source appears

in the OSD.

3 Press

l / h to toggle between the audio

and video information displays.

Using your headphones

Notes

Muting the audio output

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

PHONES

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

SPEAKERS

PRESET/TUNING

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING MEMORY

TUNING

ON/OFF

CONTROL

AUTO/MA N'L

ZONE 2

ZONE

EDIT

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

SCENE

AUDIO SELECT

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

VOLUM E

OPTIMIZER MIC

S VIDEO

VIDEO AUDIO

OPTICAL

EFFECT

SILENT CINEMA

OFF

Playing video sources in the

background of an audio source

Displaying the input source

information

AUX/DOCK

DTV/CBL

VCR

DVR

DVD

TUNER

MD/CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH IN

Audio sources

Video sources

SET MENU

.;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

.A;SIGNAL INFO

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

41 En

Playback

BASIC

OPERATION

English

4 Press

SET MENU on the remote control

again to exit from “SET MENU”.

■ Audio information

“---” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding

information.

■ Video information

Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the

standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off any external components

connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (see page 24).

Set the operator mode to

AMP and then press

SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time.

Each time you press

SLEEP, the front panel display

changes as shown below.

The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the

amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is

set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel

display, and the display returns to the selected sound field

program.

■ Canceling the sleep timer

Press

SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly

until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel

display.

The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”

disappears from the front panel display after a few

seconds.

The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing

STANDBY (or

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF) to set the main

zone to the standby mode.

FORMAT

Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a

digital signal, it automatically switches to

analog input.

SAMPLING

The number of samples per second taken from

a continuous signal to make a discrete signal.

CHANNEL

The number of source channels in the input

signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a

multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front

channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is

displayed as “3/2/0.1”.

BITRATE

The number of bits passing a given point per

second.

FLAG

Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or

PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically

switch decoders.

Note

HDMI RES.

Resolution of the HDMI signals input or

output at the HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this

unit.

HDMI ERROR

Error message for HDMI sources or

connected HDMI devices. See page 107

for details.

Using the sleep timer

SLEEP 120min SLEEP 90min

SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF

SLEEP

SLEEP120min

Flashes

SLEEP

STRAIGHT

Lights up

SLEEPOFF

Disappears

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

42 En

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from

almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing

(DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.

• The Yamaha HiFi DSP sound field programs recreate real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in

actual concert halls, music venues, movie theaters, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from

the front, back, left and right.

• You can change sound field parameters. See page 59 for details.

Rotate the

PROGRAM selector (or set the

operation mode selector to

AMP and then

press one of the sound field selector buttons (

)

repeatedly).

The name of the selected sound field program appears in

the front panel display and in the OSD.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with the corresponding input

source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the

input source (see page 38).

• When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field

program, this unit applies the selected program without

activating the DTS 96/24 decoder.

• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to

48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied.

• When the sampling frequency of the input sources are higher

than 96 kHz, this unit does not apply any sound field programs.

Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.

Sound field programs

Selecting sound field programs

Notes

Sound field program descriptions

Sound field indicators

DIALG. LIFT

SB ROOM SIZES. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLYS.INIT. DLY

P.ROOM SIZE

Sci-Fi

MOVIE

P.INIT. DLY

DSP LEVEL

MOVIE

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies.

You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and

background music.

Available sound field parameters (see page 61)

Program description

Remote control

button

Name of the

program

Created sound

fields

Category of the

program

CINEMA DSP

HiFi DSP

Presence sound field

Listening position

Surround left

sound field

Surround right

sound field

Surround back sound field

43 En

Sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ For audio music sources

For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (see page 48).

• The available sound field parameters differ depending on the settings of the speakers.

• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 70).

Notes

CLASSICAL Hall in Munich

This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal

standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener's virtual seat is

at the center left of the arena.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

DIALG.LIFT

CLASSICAL Hall in Vienna

This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings

create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

DIALG.LIFT

CLASSICAL Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are

suitable for courtly music and chamber music.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

LIVENESS

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

REV. LEVEL

DIALG.LIFT

LIVE/CLUB Cellar Club

This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the

listener is in a row in front of a small stage.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

DIALG.LIFT

LIVE/CLUB The Roxy Theatre

This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener's virtual seat is at the center left

of the hall.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

REV. LEVEL

DIALG.LIFT

LIVE/CLUB The Bottom Line

This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a

sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

DIALG.LIFT

ENTERTAIN

CLASSICAL

HiFi DSP

ENTERTAIN

CLASSICAL

HiFi DSP

CLASSICAL

HiFi DSP

LIVE/CLUB

HiFi DSP

LIVE/CLUB

HiFi DSP

LIVE/CLUB

HiFi DSP

44 En

Sound field programs

■ For various sources

• The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.

• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 70).

■ For visual sources of music

• The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.

• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 70).

Notes

ENTERTAINMENT Sports

This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts,

the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an

optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. ROOM SIZ E

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

ENTERTAINMENT Action Game

This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range

per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining

a clear sense of directions.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. ROOM SIZ E

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

ENTERTAINMENT Roleplaying Game

This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field

designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the

movie scenes in the game.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. ROOM SIZ E

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

Notes

ENTERTAINMENT Music Video

This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot

live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to

the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. ROOM SIZ E

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

ENTERTAIN

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

HiFi DSP

45 En

Sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ For movie sources

You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 64 for details.

• The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.

• “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 70).

Notes

MOVIE Standard

This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel

audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded

by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.

DSP LEVEL

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

S.LIVENESS

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

SB LIVENESS

DIALG.LIFT

MOVIE Spectacle

This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions.

It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range from very

small to extremely large sound.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. ROOM SIZE

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

MOVIE

MOVIE Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies.

You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and

background music.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. ROOM SIZE

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

MOVIE

MOVIE Adventure

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies.

The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The

reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. ROOM SIZE

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

MOVIE

MOVIE Drama

This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The

reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear

words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing.

DSP LEVEL

P. INIT. DLY

P. ROOM SIZE

S. INIT. DLY

S. ROOM SIZE

SB INI. DLY

SB ROOM SIZE

DIALG.LIFT

MOVIE

MOVIE Mono Movie

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater.

The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound

depth.

DSP LEVEL

INIT. DLY

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

REV. LEVEL

DIALG.LIFT

MOVIE

46 En

Sound field programs

■ Stereo playback

The available parameters differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.

■ The Compressed Music Enhancer

■ Using sound field programs without

surround speakers

(Virtual CINEMA DSP)

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates

virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.

When you set “SUR. L/R SP”

to “NONE” (see page 71),

Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever

you select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field

program (see page 42).

Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R

SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71) in the following cases:

– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38).

– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

– when this unit is in the “7ch Stereo” mode.

■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and

sound field programs with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA)

SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel

music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS

sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA

activates automatically whenever you connect headphones

to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or

HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 42). When

activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the

front panel display.

• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the

input source (see page 38).

• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see

page 48) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 49) is selected, or

when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 47).

Note

STEREO 2ch STEREO

Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. See page 49 for details.

DIRECT

STEREO

STEREO 7ch STEREO

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2

channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties,

etc.

CT LEVEL

SL LEVEL

SR LEVEL

SB LEVEL

PL LEVEL

PR LEVEL

MUSIC ENHANCER 2ch Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a

compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-

frequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance of the overall sound system.

Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 2-channel stereo.

Effect level

STEREO

HiFi DSP

ENHANCER

MUSIC ENHANCER 7ch Enhancer

Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo.

Effect level

ENHANCER

Note

Notes

47 En

Sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION

English

When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel

stereo sources are output from only the front left and right

speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into

the appropriate channels without any additional effect

processing.

Press

STRAIGHT (or

STRAIGHT) to select

“STRAIGHT”.

■ Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode

Press

STRAIGHT (or

STRAIGHT) so that

“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel

display.

The sound effect is turned back on.

Enjoying unprocessed input

sources (Straight decoding mode)

STRAIGHT

USING AUDIO FEATURES

48 En

Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on

the remote control to

AMP.

Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity

sound of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode

is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with

the least circuitry.

Press

PURE DIRECT (or

PURE DIRECT)

to turn the Pure Direct mode on or off.

The

PURE DIRECT button lights up while this unit is

in the Pure Direct mode. The front panel display

automatically dims.

• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in

the Pure Direct mode:

– switching the sound field program

– displaying the OSD

– adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters (except for level

settings)

– operating video functions (video conversion, etc.)

• The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this

unit is turned off.

The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation

is performed.

Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for

the front left and right speaker channels.

Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.

1 Press

TONE CONTROL on the front

panel repeatedly to select the high-frequency

response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency

response (BASS).

2 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector to adjust

the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or

the low-frequency response (BASS).

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-

frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the

surround speakers may not match.

• TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT is

selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input

source.

You can adjust the output level of each speaker while

listening to a music source. This is also possible when

playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

This operation will override the level adjustments made in

“AUTO SETUP” (see page 28) and “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see

page 72).

1 Press

LEVEL on the remote control

repeatedly to select the speaker you want to

adjust.

• Once you press

LEVEL on the remote control, you can

also select the speaker by pressing

k / n.

• Instead of “SUR.B.L” and “SUR.B.R”, “SUR.B” is

displayed if “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or

“LRGx1” (see page 71).

• The available speaker channels differ depending on the

setting of the speakers.

2 Press

l / h to adjust the speaker output

level.

•Press

h to increase the value.

•Press

l to decrease the value.

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

Using audio features

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound

Notes

Adjusting the tonal quality

Notes

Adjusting the speaker level

Note

Display Adjusted speaker

FRONT L

Front left speaker

FRONT R

Front right speaker

CENTER

Center speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

SUR. L

Surround left speaker

SUR. R

Surround right speaker

SUR.B.L

Surround back left speaker

SUR.B.R

Surround back right speaker

PRNS L

Presence left speaker

PRNS R

Presence right speaker

49 En

Using audio features

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels

and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo.

Press

STEREO on the remote control

repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”.

• You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS

OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 72).

• You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the

PROGRAM selector on the front panel.

• See page 64 for details about the parameters of the “2ch Stereo”

mode.

The night listening modes are designed to improve

listenability at lower volumes or at night.

1 Press

NIGHT on the remote control

repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or

“NIGHT:MUSIC”.

Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF

• Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to

reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and

make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.

• Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music

sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.

• Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature.

When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

2 Press

l / h to adjust the effect level while

“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is

displayed in the front panel display.

Choices: MIN, MID, MAX

• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.

• Select “MID” for standard compression.

• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.

“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are

stored independently.

• You cannot use the night listening modes in the following

cases:

–when the Pure Direct mode (see page 48) is selected.

–when the component connected to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see

page 38).

–when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness

depending on the input source and surround sound settings

you use.

Enjoying multi-channel sources in

2-channel stereo

Selecting the night listening mode

Effect.Lvl:MID

Notes

FM/AM TUNING

50 En

There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and

there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use

the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of

the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset

stations with each other.

Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector on the front

panel to select “TUNER” as the input source.

2 Press

FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press

TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the

AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel

display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press

PRESET/TUNING to turn

the colon (:) off.

4 Press

PRESET/TUNING l / h once to

begin automatic tuning.

When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED

indicator lights up and the frequency of the received

station is shown in the front panel display.

• Press

h to tune into a higher frequency.

• Press

l to tune into a lower frequency.

If the signal received from the station you want to select is

weak, tune into it manually.

Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the

tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector on the front

panel to select “TUNER” as the input source.

2 Press

FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press

TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the

AUTO indicator disappears from the front

panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press

PRESET/TUNING to turn

the colon (:) off.

4 Press

PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune

into the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to continue searching.

FM/AM tuning

Note

Automatic tuning

AFM89.10MHz

AUTO

Lights up

No colon (:)

Manual tuning

Note

AFM89.10MHz

No colon (:)

51 En

FM/AM tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up

to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 8 preset

station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) in

order. You can then recall any preset station easily by

selecting the preset station number.

1 Rotate the

INPUT selector on the front

panel to select “TUNER” as the input source.

2 Press

FM/AM to select “FM” as the

reception band.

“FM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press and hold

MEMORY for more than 3

seconds.

The preset station number as well as the MEMORY

and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5

seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current

frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

• You can specify the preset number from which this unit

stores FM stations. Press

A/B/C/D/E and then

PRESET/TUNING l / h repeatedly after you

perform step 3 to select the preset station number under

which the first station will be stored.

• You can begin tuning toward lower frequencies to store

FM stations automatically. Press

PRESET/TUNING

so that the colon (:) disappears from the front panel

display and then press

PRESET/TUNING l after

pressing and holding

MEMORY for more than 3

seconds.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station

number is cleared when you store a new station under the

same preset station number.

• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),

automatic preset tuning automatically stops after

searching for all the available stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station

you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it

manually and store it as described in “Manual preset

tuning” below.

• Only Radio Data System broadcasting station are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning (Europe model

only).

You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset

station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)

manually.

1 Tune into a station.

See page 50 for tuning instructions.

2 Press

MEMORY on the front panel.

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 10 seconds.

3 Press

A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a

preset station group (A to E) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The selected preset station group letter appears.

Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel

display.

Automatic preset tuning

A1:FM89.10MHz

AUTO MEMORY

Flashes

Notes

Manual preset tuning

MEMORY

Flashes

A:FM89.10MHz

MEMORY

Preset station

group

Flashes

Colon (:)

52 En

FM/AM tuning

4 Press

PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a

preset station number (1 to 8) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

• Press

h to select a higher preset station number.

• Press

l to select a lower preset station number.

5 Press

MEMORY while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

The station band and frequency appear in the front

panel display with the preset station group and

number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator

disappears from the front panel display.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station

number is cleared when you store a new station under the

same preset station number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along

with the station frequency.

You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting

the preset station group and number under which it was

stored.

When performing this operation with the remote control, set the

operation mode selector to

SOURCE and then press TUNER

to select “TUNER” as the input source.

1 Press

A/B/C/D/E (or press

A/B/C/D/E l

/ h) to select the desired preset station

group (A to E).

The preset station group letter appears in the front

panel display and changes each time you press the

button.

2 Press

PRESET/TUNING l / h on the

front panel (or

PRESET/CH k / n on the

remote control) to select the desired preset

station number (1 to 8).

The preset station group and number appear in the

front panel display along with the station band and

frequency.

You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Select preset station “E1” using

A/B/C/D/E

and

PRESET/TUNING l / h on the front

panel.

See “Selecting preset stations” on the left column.

2 Press and hold

EDIT for more than 3

seconds.

“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

3 Select preset station “A5” using

A/B/C/D/

E and

PRESET/TUNING l / h.

“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

See “Selecting preset stations” on the left column.

4 Press

EDIT again.

“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and

the assignments of the two preset stations are

exchanged.

Notes

Selecting preset stations

A1:FM89.10MHz

MEMORY

Preset station number

Flashes

A1:FM89.10MHz

The displayed station has been stored as A1.

Exchanging preset stations

A1:FM89.10MHz

E1:FM89.10MHz

MEMORY

Flashes

A5:FM89.10MHz

MEMORY

Flashes

RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY)

53 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. This unit can receive various

Radio Data System data such as PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), CT (clock time), and EON

(enhanced other networks) when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations.

Use this feature to display the 4 types of the Radio Data

System information: PS (program service), PTY (program

type), RT (radio text) and CT (clock time). The

corresponding indicators light up in the front panel

display.

• You can select one of the Radio Data System display modes

only when the corresponding Radio Data System indicator

lights up in the front panel display. It may take a while for this

unit to receive all of the Radio Data System data from the

station.

• You can select only the available Radio Data System display

modes being offered by the station.

• If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit

may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In

particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and

may not be available even when the other Radio Data System

display modes are available.

• In case of poor reception conditions, press

TUNING AUTO/

MAN’L on the front panel so that the AUTO indicator

disappears from the front panel display.

• If the signal strength is weakened by external interference while

this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception

may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front

panel display.

• When the “RT” mode is selected, this unit can display the

program information by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric

characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters

are displayed with the “_” (underscore).

• If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT

WAIT” appears in the front panel display.

1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System

broadcasting station.

• We recommend using the automatic preset tuning

to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting

stations (see page 51).

• You can also use PTY SEEK mode to tune into the

desired Radio Data System broadcasting station

from the preset ones.

2 Press

FREQ/TEXT on the remote control

repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data

System display mode.

• Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data

System program currently being received.

• Select “PTY” to display the type of the Radio Data

System program currently being received.

• Select “RT” to display the information on the

Radio Data System program currently being

received.

• Select “CT” to display the current time.

Radio Data System tuning

(Europe model only)

Displaying the Radio Data System

information

Notes

CTRTPTYPS

Frequency display

54 En

Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only)

Use this feature to select the desired radio program by

program type from the all preset Radio Data System

broadcasting stations.

Use the automatic preset tuning feature to preset Radio Data

System broadcasting stations (see page 51).

1 Set the operation mode selector to

SOURCE and then press

TUNER on

the remote control to select “TUNER” as the

input source.

2 Press

BAND repeatedly to select “FM” as

the reception band.

3 Press

PTY SEEK MODE on the remote

control to set this unit to the PTY SEEK

mode.

The name of the program type or “NEWS” flashes in

the front panel display.

To cancel the PTY SEEK mode, press

PTY SEEK

MODE on the remote control again.

4 Press

PRESET/CH k / n on the remote

control to select the desired program type.

The name of the selected program type appears in the

front panel display.

Selecting the Radio Data System

program type (PTY SEEK mode)

Flashes

NEWS

Program type Descriptions

NEWS

News

AFFAIRS

Current affairs

INFO

General information

SPORT

Sports

EDUCATE

Education

DRAMA

Drama

CULTURE

Culture

SCIENCE

Science

VARIED

Light entertainment

POP M

Popular music

ROCK M

Rock music

M.O.R. M

Middle-of-the-road music (easy-

listening)

LIGHT M

Light classics

CLASSICS

Serious classics

OTHER M

Other music

Lights up

POP M

55 En

Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only)

BASIC

OPERATION

English

5 Press

PTY SEEK START on the remote

control to start searching for all the available

Radio Data System preset stations.

The name of the selected program type flashes and

the PTY HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel

display while this unit is searching for stations.

To stop searching for stations, press

PTY SEEK START

on the remote control again.

• This unit stops searching for stations when a station

broadcasting the selected program type is found.

• If the station found is not the one you desire, press

PTY

SEEK START again to resume searching for another

station broadcasting the same program type.

Use this feature to receive the EON (enhanced other

networks) data service of the Radio Data System station

network. Once you select one of the 4 Radio Data System

program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or SPORT), this

unit automatically searches for all the available preset

stations that are scheduled to broadcast the EON data

service of the selected program type for a certain duration

of time. When the scheduled EON data service starts, this

unit automatically switches to the local station

broadcasting the EON data service and then switches back

to the national station once the EON data service ends.

• You can use this feature only when the EON data service is

available.

• The EON indicator lights up in the front panel display only

when the EON data service is being received from a Radio Data

System station.

1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System

broadcasting station.

2 Make sure the EON indicator is lit in the front

panel display.

If the EON indicator is not lit in the front panel

display, select another Radio Data System program so

that the EON indicator lights up.

3 Press

EON on the remote control

repeatedly to select one of the 4 Radio Data

System program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS,

INFO or SPORT).

The name of the selected program type appears in the

front panel display.

To cancel the EON feature, press EON on the remote control

repeatedly until the name of the program type disappears

and “EON OFF” appears in the front panel display.

Notes

POP M

PTY HOLD

Flashes Lights up

Using the enhanced other

networks (EON) data service

Notes

EON

NEWS

Lights up

USING IPOD™

56 En

Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to

the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 23), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control.

You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression

artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 46).

• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.

• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.

• For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other

components” on page 84.

• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in

“Troubleshooting” on page 107.

• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

• Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the

analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.

• Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK

terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or

not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “STANDBY CHARGE” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 81). The

DOCK indicator turns on while this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod when this unit is in the standby mode.

You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as

the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done

with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode)

or without it (simple remote mode).

■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote

mode

You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,

stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without

the aid of the OSD of this unit.

• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.

• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.

■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse

mode

You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod

using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD

of this unit. You can browse the songs stored on your iPod

in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for

your iPod to suit your personal preferences.

• The name of the song being played also appears in the front

panel display according to the “FL SCROLL” parameter in

“OPTION MENU” (see page 79).

• You can select the amount of time the iPod menu and play

information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-

SOURCE” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79).

• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.

• The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your

iPod.

• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front

panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are

replaced with underscores “_”.

• The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in

the OSD. Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between

the “Settings” parameter settings.

• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your

iPod in the OSD. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy

watching the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.

Using iPod™

Notes

Controlling iPod™

Notes

57 En

Using iPod™

BASIC

OPERATION

English

1 Set the operation mode selector to

SOURCE and then press

DISPLAY on

the remote control.

The following display appears in the OSD.

2 Press

k / n / l / h to navigate the iPod

menu and then press

ENTER to begin

playback of the selected song.

Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums

(albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres),

Composers (composers), Settings (settings)

• Playlists > Songs

• Artists > Albums > Songs

• Albums > Songs

• Songs

• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs

• Composers > Albums > Songs

• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat

Shuffle Shuffle

Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in

random order.

Choices: Off, Songs, Albums

• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random

order.

• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in

random order.

When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off”, “ ” appears

in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled.

Repeat Repeat

Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a

sequence of songs.

Choices: Off, One, All

• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.

• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of

songs.

When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” or “ ”

appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of

songs are being repeated.

■ The function of the play information

display

1 Track number/total tracks

2 Name of the artist

3 Name of the album

4 Name of the song

5 Progress bar

6 Elapsed time

7 Shuffle and repeat icons

8 h (playback), e (pausing), f (search forward)

and w (search backward)

9 Remaining time

Playlists

Artists

Albums

Songs

Genres

Composers

Settings

iPod Top

1 All

iPod[Play]

1/9



FrankieZipper

Made-to-order

RoadtoIndia



||||||||;;;;;;;;;;;;

0:51-7:44

All

RECORDING

58 En

Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating

instructions for those components.

• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.

• TONE CONTROL (see page 48) and VOLUME settings, the speaker level (see page 72) and the sound field programs (see page 42)

do not affect recorded material.

• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.

• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise,

analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is

connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.

• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.

• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing

video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can only record an

S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.

• The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright

laws.

Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

1 Turn on all the connected components.

2 Rotate the

INPUT selector (or press one

of the input selector buttons (

)) to select

the source component you want to record

from.

3 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

Recording

Caution

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being

recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and

adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your

DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output

from the player.

Notes

If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture

itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS

59 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory

settings. Although you do not have to change the initial

factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to

better suit the input source or your listening room.

You cannot change the sound field parameter values when

“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see

page 80). If you want to change the sound field parameter values,

set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

DISPLAY on the remote

control.

The following status screen appears in the OSD.

3 Press one of the sound field program

selector buttons (

) repeatedly to select the

desired sound field program you want to

adjust.

4 Press

k / n to select the desired sound

field parameter and then

l / h to change

the selected sound field parameter value.

• For details about the function and control range of each sound

field parameter, see page 61.

• When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the

initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the

sound field parameter name in the OSD.

• The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field

programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD.

In this case, press

k / n to scroll through pages.

• If you press and hold

l / h to change the sound field

parameter value, the initial factory settings are shown

momentarily in the front panel display.

• Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to

initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a

sound field program group (see page 80).

• You can select the amount of time that the current status is

displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP” parameter in

“OPTION MENU” (see page 79).

5 Press

DISPLAY to turn off the sound field

parameter display.

Advanced sound configurations

Changing sound field parameter

settings

Note



NIGHT:OFF



A.SEL:HDMI

INPUT:DVD



Sci-Fi

MOVIE

STATUSVOL:-40.0dB

PARAMETER

MOVIE

.  Sci-Fi 1/2

PROLOGIC

DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB

P.INIT.DLY;;16ms

P.ROOM.SIZE;;1.0

S.INIT.DLY;;20ms

[RETURN]:STATUS

Cursor

60 En

Advanced sound configurations

■ Basic configuration of sound field

programs

To change sound field parameter settings, see page 59 for details.

Each sound field program has some parameters defining

the characteristics of the program. To customize the

selected sound field program, adjust “DSP LEVEL” and/

or “DIALG.LIFT” first, and then try other parameters.

Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound

field programs (DSP LEVEL)

Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect

sounds) to the original source sound to create sound field

in the listening room. Use the “DSP LEVEL” parameter to

adjust the level of the effect sounds.

Adjust “DSP LEVEL” as follows:

Increase the value of “DSP LEVEL” when

• The effect sound of the selected sound field

program is too weak.

• You cannot recognize any difference between the

sound field programs.

Decrease the value of “DSP LEVEL” when

• The sound is vague.

• You feel that the additional sound effect is

excessive.

Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB

Adjusting the vertical dialogue position

(DIALG.LIFT)

Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the

dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is

at the center of the video monitor screen.

If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video

monitor screen, increase the value of “DIALG.LIFT”.

Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

“0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the

highest position.

• “DIALG.LIFT” is only available only “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”

is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72).

• You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial

dialogue position.

The DSP effect

sound level is low.

The DSP effect sound

level is high.

Notes

The ideal

dialogue

position.

Move up to the ideal dialogue position.

61 En

Advanced sound configurations

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Sound field parameters for the advanced configurations

Use the following sound field parameters to customize sound field programs in detail.

To change sound field parameter settings, see page 59 for details.

Sound field parameter Features

INIT.DLY

P.INIT.DLY

S.INIT.DLY

SB INI.DLY

Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the

apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the

first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to

the listener.

When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend adjusting the corresponding

room size parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP

programs.

Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY)

1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY)

Source sound

Early

reflections

Time

Delay

Sound source

Reflection face

Level

Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms

Level

62 En

Advanced sound configurations

ROOM SIZE

P.ROOM SIZE

S.ROOM SIZE

SB ROOM SIZE

Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the

surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the

sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between

the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the

reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter

from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.

When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend adjusting the corresponding

initial delay parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP

programs.

Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

LIVENESS

S.LIVENESS

SB LIVENESS

Liveness. Surround and surround back sound field liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual

walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of

a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one

which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to

as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter

lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.

Control range: 0 to 10

Sound field parameter Features

Level

Time Time Time

Source sound

Early

reflections

Small value = 0.1

Large value = 2.0

Sound source

Source sound

Level

Dead

Live

Time

Time Time

Small reflected

sound

Large reflected

sound

Small value = 0 Large value = 10

63 En

Advanced sound configurations

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

REV.TIME

Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation

sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment

over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening

room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments.

Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s

REV.DELAY

Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and

the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound

begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.

Control range: 0 to 250 ms

REV.LEVEL

Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the

stronger the reverberation becomes.

Control range: 0 to 100%

Sound field parameter Features

Reverberation

ReverberationSource sound

REV.TIME

Sound source

Short

reverberation

Long

reverberation

Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s

Early reflections

60 dB 60 dB 60 dB

(dB)

Level

Source sound

Reverberation

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

Time

60 dB

Source sound

Level

REV. LEVEL

Time

64 En

Advanced sound configurations

■ Selecting decoders used with sound

field programs (Decoder Type)

Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with

MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”).

See page 45 for details about MOVIE sound field

program.

Available decoders

■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel

sources (surround decode mode)

Use this feature to play back sources with selected

decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multi-

channels.

Set the operation mode selector to

AMP and

then press

SUR. DECODE repeatedly on the

remote control to select the desired surround

decoder.

You can select from the following modes depending on the

type of source you are playing and your personal

preference.

You can change the decoder parameter settings. Press DISPLAY

and then

k / n repeatedly on the remote control to select the

desired decoder parameter. You can change the value of the

selected parameter by pressing

l / h repeatedly on the

remote control.

2ch Stereo

DIRECT

2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and the DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi

stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only

when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 48).

• Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry

when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB.

• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2

channels and output from the front left and right speakers.

• The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the

subwoofer in the following cases:

– “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 70).

– “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 71) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR”

(see page 70).

7ch Stereo

CT LEVEL

SL LEVEL

SR LEVEL

SB LEVEL

PL LEVEL

PR LEVEL

7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence

right levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode. The

available parameters differ depending on the setting of the speakers.

Control range: 0 to 100%

2ch Enhancer

7ch Enhancer

2-channel and 7-channel Compressed Music Enhancer effect level. The high-frequency signals

of some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set the effect level to “LOW”.

Choices: HIGH, LOW

• Select “HIGH” for a high effect level.

• Select “LOW” for a low effect level.

Sound field parameter Features

Decoder Functions

PRO LOGIC

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any

sources

PLIIx Movie

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro

Logic II) processing for movie

sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder

is not available when “SUR. B L/R

SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71).

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie sources

Selecting decoders

65 En

Advanced sound configurations

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Decoder descriptions

When you select the surround decode mode for Dolby Digital, DTS or DTS 96/24 sources, this unit automatically selects “SURROUND

DECODE Dolby Digital”, “SURROUND DECODE DTS” or “SURROUND DECODE DTS 96/24” program.

SURROUND DECODE PRO LOGIC

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.

SURROUND DECODE

PLIIx Movie

PL II Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when

“SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71).

SURROUND DECODE

PLIIx Music

PL II Music

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when

“SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71).

PANORAMA DIMENSION CENTER WIDTH

SURROUND DECODE

PLIIx Game

PL II Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when

“SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71).

CENTER WIDTHDIMENSION

PLIIMusic

PLIIxMusic

SURROUND DECODE

PANORAMA

SUR.DECODE

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not

available when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71).

Available sound field parameters (see page 66)

Program description

Remote control

button

Name of the

program

Category of the

program

SUR.DECODE

SURROUND DECODE Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie sources.

SUR.DECODE

SURROUND DECODE Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music sources.

C. IMAGE

SUR.DECODE

66 En

Advanced sound configurations

Decoder parameter descriptions

Decoder parameter Features

PRO LOGIC IIx Music

PRO LOGIC II Music

PANORAMA

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as

well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.

Choices: OFF, ON

PRO LOGIC IIx Music

PRO LOGIC II Music

DIMENSION

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front

or towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)

Initial setting: STD (standard)

PRO LOGIC IIx Music

PRO LOGIC II Music

CENTER WIDTH

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely

towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center

channel output towards the front left and right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to

7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)

Initial setting: 3

DTS Neo:6 Music

C.IMAGE

DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center

channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.

Control range: 0.0 to 1.0

Initial setting: 0.3

CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP)

67 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this

unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening

environment.

■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP

Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 28).

■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP

Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.

Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU

Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or

compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.

Input menu 2 INPUT MENU

Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source.

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Parameter Features Page

A)SPEAKER SET

Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, the crossover

frequency, and the assignment of the EXTRA SP terminal.

B)SPEAKER LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of each speaker.

C)SP DISTANCE

Adjusts the distance of each speaker.

D)EQUALIZER

Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.

E)LFE LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

F)DYNAMIC RANGE

Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

G)AUDIO SET

Adjusts the muting level, audio delay, maximum volume level and initial volume level.

H)HDMI SET

Selects the component to play back HDMI audio signals.

I)EXTD SUR.

Selects the mode of the decoders for the 6.1/7.1-channel playback.

Parameter Features Page

A)I/O ASSIGNMENT

Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used.

B)INPUT RENAME

Changes the name of the input source.

C)VOLUME TRIM

Adjusts the output volume of each input source.

D)DECODER MODE

Selects the input mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear

panel of this unit.

E)MULTI CH SET

Sets the input channel numbers and other parameters of the input multi channel.

68 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Option menu 3 OPTION MENU

Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters.

■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO

Use this feature to check audio and video signal information (see page 40).

Parameter Features Page

A)DISPLAY SET

Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals.

B)MEMORY GUARD

Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings.

C)AUDIO SELECT

Designates the default audio input jack select setting mode for the input sources when you turn

on the power of this unit.

D)PARAM.INI

Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.

E)ZONE 2 SET

Adjusts the Zone 2 parameters.

F)DOCK SET

Selects whether this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod or not when this unit is in

the standby mode.

69 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

• You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is

reproducing sound.

• Press

RETURN to return to the previous menu level.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP

and then press

SET MENU to enter “SET

MENU”.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

2 Press

k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”

and then

ENTER to enter “MANUAL

SETUP”.

The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the

OSD.

3 Press

k / n repeatedly and then press

ENTER to select and enter the desired

menu.

The following displays are examples where “SOUND

MENU” is selected.

4 Press

k / n repeatedly and then press

ENTER to select and enter the desired

submenu.

The following display is an example where “LFE

LEVEL” is selected.

5 Press

k / n to select the desired parameter

and then

l / h to change the parameter

settings.

6 Press

SET MENU to exit from “SET

MENU”.

Using SET MENU

SET MENU

.;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

.A;SIGNAL INFO

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

MANUAL SETUP

. 1 SOUND MENU

2 INPUT MENU

3 OPTION MENU

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

MANUAL SETUP

1 SOUND MENU 1/2

. A)SPEAKER SET

B)SPEAKER LEVEL

C)SP DISTANCE

D)EQUALIZER

E)LFE LEVEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

MANUAL SETUP

1 SOUND MENU 2/2

. F)DYNAMIC RANGE

G)AUDIO SET

H)HDMI SET

I)EXTD SUR.

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SOUND MENU

E)LFE LEVEL

. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB

HEADPHONE;;;;0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[

[ ]/[ ]:Adjust

70 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Use this feature to manually adjust speaker settings or

compensate for video signal processing delays when using

LCD monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU

parameters are set automatically when you run AUTO

SETUP (see page 28).

■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET

Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings.

Extra speakers assignment EXTRA SP ASSIGN

Selects the function of the speakers connected to the

EXTRA SP terminals.

Choices: FRONT B, ZONE2, PRESENCE, NONE

When you use the alternative front speaker

system (see page 38)

Select “FRONT B”.

When you use the Zone 2 speakers (see

page 96)

Select “ZONE2” to set the function of the speakers to

the Zone 2 speakers.

When you use the presence speakers (see

page 12)

Select “PRESENCE” to set the function of the speakers

to the presence speakers.

When you do not use the EXTRA SP terminals

Select “NONE” to deactivate the EXTRA SP

terminals.

• This parameter shares the value with the “EXTRA SP

ASSIGN” parameter in “AUTO SETUP”.

• If you select “ON” in “BI-AMP” (see page 101), you cannot

select “PRESENCE” or “ZONE2” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”.

• After changing the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” setting, carry out

“AUTO SETUP” again (see page 28).

FRONT B speakers setting FRONT B

The “FRONT B” parameter is available only when you set

“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B”.

Use this feature to select the location of the FRONT B

speakers.

Choices: FRONT, ZONE B

• Select “FRONT” to turn FRONT A and B on or off

when the FRONT B speakers are set in the main room.

• Select “ZONE B” if the FRONT B speakers are set in

another room. If FRONT A is turned off and FRONT B

is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer

in the main room are muted and this unit outputs sound

at the FRONT B terminals only.

• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the

sound is output from both the headphones and the EXTRA SP

terminals when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”.

• If a DSP program is selected when “FRONT B” is set to

“ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA

DSP mode (see page 46).

Presence/Surround back channel priority

PRIORITY

The “PRIORITY” parameter is available only when you

set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE”.

Use this feature to prioritize either the presence or the

surround back speakers when playing sources that contain

surround back channel signals using the CINEMA DSP

sound field programs.

Choices: PRNS, SUR. B

• Select “PRNS” to use the presence speakers even when

surround back channel signals are input. The signals

for the surround back channels will be output from the

surround speakers.

• Select “SUR. B” to use the surround back speakers

when surround back channel signals are detected in a

CINEMA DSP program. The presence channel signals

are output from the front speakers.

1 SOUND MENU

Notes

MANUAL SETUP

1 SOUND MENU 1/2

. A)SPEAKER SET

B)SPEAKER LEVEL

C)SP DISTANCE

D)EQUALIZER

E)LFE LEVEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

MANUAL SETUP

1 SOUND MENU 2/2

. F)DYNAMIC RANGE

G)AUDIO SET

H)HDMI SET

I)EXTD SUR.

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SOUND MENU

. EXTRA SP ASSIGN

ZONE2 >FRONT B

PRESENCE NONE

FRONT B;;;;FRONT

PRIORITY;;;;;---

ZONE2 SET

Not Available

Notes

71 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Front speakers FRONT SP

Choices: SMALL, LARGE

When the front speakers are large

Select “LARGE” (large).

When the front speakers are small

Select “SMALL” (small).

When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 70), you

can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of

“FRONT SP” is set to a setting other than “LARGE” in advance,

this unit automatically changes the value to “LARGE”.

Center speaker CENTER SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

When the center speaker is large

Select “LRG” (large).

When the center speaker is small

Select “SML” (small).

When you do not use the center speaker

Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are

directed to the front left and right speakers.

Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

When the surround speakers are large

Select “LRG” (large).

When the surround speakers are small

Select “SML” (small).

When you do not use the surround speakers

Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual

CINEMA DSP mode (see page 46), and “SUR. B L/R

SP” is automatically set to “NONE”.

Surround back left/right speakers SUR. B L/R SP

Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2

When the surround back left and right

speakers are large

Select “LRGx2” (large x 2).

When the single surround back speaker is

large

Select “LRGx1” (large x 1).

When the surround back left and right

speakers are small

Select “SMLx2” (small x 2).

When the single surround back speaker is

small

Select “SMLx1” (small x 1).

When you do not use the surround back

speakers

Select “NONE” (none). The surround back channel

signals are directed to the surround left and right

speakers.

Woofer section of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large

Woofer section of a speaker is smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small

Note

SOUND MENU

FRONT SP

SMALL >LARGE

SOUND MENU

CENTER SP

NONE >SML LRG

SOUND MENU

SUR. L/R SP

NONE >SML LRG

SOUND MENU

SUR.B L/R SP

SMLx1 >SMLx2 LRGx1

72 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

LFE/Bass out LFE/BASS OUT

Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE

(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.

Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH

When a subwoofer is connected to this unit

and you want to get natural bass sound

Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well

as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to

“SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer.

When a subwoofer is connected to this unit

and you want to get rich bass sound

Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of

any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE

signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other

speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to

the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front

left and right channels are directed to the front left and

right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the

“FRONT SP” setting.

When you do not use a subwoofer

Select “FRNT” (front). The LFE signals, the

low-frequency signals of the front left and right

channels, and the low-frequency signals of other

speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed

to the front left and right speakers regardless of the

“FRONT SP” setting.

Bass crossover CROSSOVER

Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the

speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in

“SPEAKER SET” (see page 71). All frequencies below

the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to

the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER

SET” (see page 71).

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,

120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE

Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if

bass sounds are lacking or unclear.

Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE

• Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the

phase of your subwoofer.

• Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your

subwoofer.

■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL

Use this feature to manually adjust the output level of each

speaker.

Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting

of the speakers.

• Instead of “SBL” and “SBR”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/R

SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 71).

SOUND MENU

LFE/BASS OUT

SWFR FRNT>BOTH

SOUND MENU

CROSSOVER

FREQ;;;80Hz

SPEAKER LEVEL Adjusted speaker

Front left speaker

Front right speaker

Center speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

Surround left speaker

Surround right speaker

SBR

Surround back right speaker

SBL

Surround back left speaker

Presence left speaker

Presence right speaker

Notes

SOUND MENU

SUBWOOFER PHASE

>NORMAL REVERSE

SOUND MENU

B)SPEAKER LEVEL 1/2

__________

. FL;;;;;;;;;;

FR;;;;;;;;;;

C;;;;;;;;;;

SWFR;;;;;;;;;;

73 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE

Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each

speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.

Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the

main listening position. However, this is not possible in

most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay

must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all

sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same

time.

Unit UNIT

Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)

Initial setting:

[U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft)

[Other models]: meters (m)

• Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters.

• Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet.

Speaker distances

Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)

Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)

Initial setting:

FRONT L/FRONT R/CENTER/SWFR/SUR. L/SUR. R/

PRNS L/PRNS R: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

SB L/SB R: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)

• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting

of the speakers.

• Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/

R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 71).

■ Equalizer D)EQUALIZER

Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer or the

graphic equalizer.

Equalizer type select EQ TYPE SELECT

Use this feature to select the type of equalizer.

Choices: AUTO PEQ, CENTER GEQ, EQ OFF

• Select “AUTO PEQ” to use the parametric equalizer

adjusted in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 28).

• Select “CENTER GEQ” to adjust the built-in

5-frequency band graphic equalizer so that the tonal

quality of the center speaker matches that of the front

left and right speakers. Press

k / n to display the

graphic equalizer screen.

• Select “EQ OFF” to deactivate the equalizing feature.

When you carry out “AUTO SETUP” in advance (see page 28),

“AUTO PEQ” is automatically selected as the default setting.

Test tone TEST

Use this feature to make adjustments for “CENTER GEQ”

while listening to a test tone.

Choices: OFF, ON

• Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently

selected source component.

• Select “ON” to output test tones from the center and

front left speakers.

SP DISTANCE Adjusted speaker

FRONT L

Front left speaker

FRONT R

Front right speaker

CENTER

Center speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

SUR. L

Surround left speaker

SUR. R

Surround right speaker

SB L

Surround back left speaker

SB R

Surround back right speaker

PRNS L

Presence left speaker

PRNS R

Presence right speaker

Notes

SOUND MENU

C)SP DISTANCE 1/2

. UNIT;;;;;;meters

FRONT L;;;3.00m

FRONT R;;;3.00m

CENTER;;;;3.00m

SWFR;;;;;;3.00m

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ ]/[ ]:Adjust

[

Note

SOUND MENU

D)EQUALIZER

EQ TYPE SELECT

. CENTER GEQ

[ ]/[]:CT GEQ

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

SOUND MENU

. TEST >OFF ON

______

100Hz ;;;;;; 0dB

300Hz ;;;;;; 0dB

1kHz ;;;;;; 0dB

3kHz ;;;;;; 0dB

10kHz ;;;;;; 0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[

[ ]/[ ]:Adjust

74 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Center graphic equalizer CENTER GEQ

Use to match the tonal quality of the center speaker with

that of the front left and right speakers. You can adjust 5

frequency bands (100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz and

10 kHz).

Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

Press

k / n to select a frequency band and

l / h to adjust

the selected frequency band.

The “CENTER GEQ” parameter can be adjusted only when

“CENTER GEQ” is selected in “EQ TYPE SELECT”.

■ Low-frequency effect level

E)LFE LEVEL

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of

your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries

low-frequency special effects which are only added to

certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit

decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

Control range: –20 to 0 dB

Control step: 1 dB

Speaker SPEAKER

Adjusts the speaker LFE level.

Headphone HEADPHONE

Adjusts the headphone LFE level.

Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70),

some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT

jack.

■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE

Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range

compression to be applied to your speakers or

headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is

decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.

Choices: MIN, STD, MAX

• Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low

volume levels.

• Select “STD” (standard) for general use.

• Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest

amount of dynamic range.

Speaker SP

Adjusts the speaker compression.

Headphone HP

Adjusts the headphone compression.

■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET

Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this

unit.

Muting type MUTING TYPE

Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function

reduces the output volume (see page 40).

Choices: FULL, –20dB

• Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio

output.

• Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.

Audio delay AUDIO DELAY

Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize

it with the video image. This may be necessary when

using certain LCD monitors or projectors.

Control range: 0 to 160 ms

Control step: 1 ms

Note

SOUND MENU

TEST >OFF ON

______

. 100Hz ;;;;;; 0dB

300Hz ;;;;;; 0dB

1kHz ;;;;;; 0dB

3kHz ;;;;;; 0dB

10kHz ;;;;;; 0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[

[ ]/[ ]:Adjust

SOUND MENU

E)LFE LEVEL

. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB

HEADPHONE;;;;0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[

[ ]/[ ]:Adjust

SOUND MENU

F)DYNAMIC RANGE

. SP: MIN STD>MAX

HP: MIN STD>MAX

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[

[ ]/[ ]:Select

SOUND MENU

G)AUDIO SET

. MUTING TYPE;FULL

A.DELAY;;;;;;0ms

MAX VOL.;+16.5dB

INI.VOL.;;;;;OFF

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[

[ ]/[ ]:Select

75 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Maximum volume MAX VOL.

Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the

main zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected

loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume

range is 16.5 dB to –80.0 dB. However, when “MAX

VOL.” is set to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes

–5.0 dB to –80.0 dB.

Control range: 16.5 dB, 15.0 dB to –30.0 dB

Control step: 5.0 dB

• When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level

is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “MAX

VOL.” setting.

• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “Initial

Volume” setting. For example, if “INI VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB

and “MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is

automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of

this unit next time.

• Use “MAX VOL.” in “ZONE2 SET” to set the initial volume

level in Zone 2 (see page 81).

Initial volume INI VOL.

Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone

when the power of this unit is turned on.

Choices: Off, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI VOL.”

setting.

• Use “INI VOL.” in “ZONE2 SET” to set the initial volume level

in Zone 2 (see page 81).

■ HDMI setting H)HDMI SET

Use this feature to select the component to play back

HDMI audio signals.

Support audio SUPPORT AUDIO

Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI audio

signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected

to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit.

Choices: RX-V661, OTHER

• Select “RX-V661” to play back HDMI audio signals

on this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the

HDMI IN jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI

component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the

rear panel of this unit.

• Select “OTHER” to play back HDMI audio signals on

another HDMI component connected to the HDMI

OUT jack.

The HDMI video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack

of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit.

■ Extended surround decoders

I)EXTD SUR.

Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for

multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx,

Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders by using the

connected surround back speakers.

Mode MODE

Use this feature to select the mode of the decoder driving.

Choices: AUTO, ON, OFF

• Select “AUTO” to activate the optimum decoder to

play back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels when a signal

flag that can be recognized by this unit is input.

• Select “ON” to play back multi-channel sources using

the selected decoder type in “TYPE”.

• Select “OFF” not to use the decoders to create 6.1/7.1

channels.

Decoder type TYPE

Use this feature to select the decoders used to play back

multi-channel sources when you select “ON” in “MODE”.

Choices: PLIIxMovie, PLIIxMusic, EX/ES, EX

• Select “PLIIxMovie” to play back Dolby Digital or

DTS signals in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx

movie decoder.

• Select “PLIIx Music” to play back Dolby Digital or

DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx

music decoder.

• Select “EX/ES” to play back Dolby Digital or DTS

signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX

or DTS-ES decoder.

• Select “EX” to play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals

in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX

decoder.

Notes

SOUND MENU

H)HDMI SET

SUPPORT AUDIO:

RX-V661

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

[ENTER]:Return

Note

SOUND MENU

I)EXTD SUR.

. MODE;;;;;;;;AUTO

[

[ ]/[ ]:Select

SOUND MENU

I)EXTD SUR.

. MODE;;;;;;;;;;ON

TYPE;;;PL xMovieII

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[

[ ]/[ ]:Select

76 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Use this feature to activate the desired decoder manually when

this unit cannot detect the signal flag encoded to the input sources

correctly.

• The available decoders vary depending on the setting of the

speakers and the input sources.

• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible in the following cases:

– when “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 71) or “SUR. B L/R SP” (see

page 71) is set to “NONE”.

– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks is being played.

– when the source being played does not contain surround left

and right channel signals.

– when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.

– when the stereo playback, Compressed Music Enhancer (see

page 46) or Pure Direct (see page 48) mode is selected.

– when “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” (see page 101).

• When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to

“AUTO”.

Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the

input mode or rename the input source.

■ Input/output assignment

A)I/O ASSIGNMENT

Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according

to the component to be used if the initial settings of this

unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the

following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and

effectively connect more components.

Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select

the corresponding component by using the INPUT

selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on

the remote control).

The input source name in parentheses indicates the default

assigned input source.

For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C

CMPNT-V INPUT

Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR

[B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR

[C] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR

Notes

2 INPUT MENU

MANUAL SETUP

2 INPUT MENU

. A)I/O ASSIGNMENT

B)INPUT RENAME

C)VOLUME TRIM

D)DECODER MODE

E)MULTI CH SET

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

INPUT MENU

CMPNT-V INPUT

. [A];;;;; DVD

( DVD )

[B];;;;;DTV/CBL

(DTV/CBL))

[C];;;;; DVR

( DVR )

77 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1

OPTICAL OUT

Choices: (1) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,

V-AUX, VCR, DVR

• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same

type of jack.

• When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT

(COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority

is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT

(COAXIAL) jack.

For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4

OPTICAL IN

Choices: (2) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,

DVR, VCR

(3) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,

DVR, VCR

(4) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,

DVR, VCR

For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 5 and 6 COAXIAL IN

Choices: (5) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,

V-AUX, DVR, VCR

(6) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,

V-AUX, DVR, VCR

For HDMI IN jacks 1 and 2 HDMI IN

Choices: [IN1] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR

[IN2] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR

■ Input rename B)INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the input source

that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.

• This feature is useful when you change the input or output

assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks.

• You can only rename DOCK when iPod is stationed in the

Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit.

1 Press one of the input selector buttons (

)

on the remote control to select the input

source you want to change the name of.

2 Press

l / h to place the “_” (underscore)

under the space or the character you want to

edit.

3 Press

k / n to select the character you

want to use and then press

l / h to move

to the next space.

• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.

•Press

n to change the character in the following order,

or press

k to go in the reverse order:

A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.), space.

4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each

input source.

5 Press

ENTER on the remote control to exit

from “INPUT RENAME”.

Notes

INPUT MENU

OPTICAL OUT

. (1);;;;;MD/CD-R

(MD/CD-R )

INPUT MENU

OPTICAL IN

. (2);;;;;MD/CD-R

(MD/CD-R )

(3);;;;; DVD

( DVD )

(4);;;;;DTV/CBL

(DTV/CBL )

INPUT MENU

COAXIAL IN

. (5);;;;; CD

(CD)

(6);;;;; DVD

( DVD )

(4);;;;;DTV/CBLTA

Notes

INPUT MENU

HDMI IN

. [IN1];;; DVD

( DVD )

[IN2];;;DTV/CBL

(DTV/CBL))

INPUT MENU

B)INPUT RENAME

DVD -> MY DVD

[ ]/[ ]:Position

[ ]/[ ]:Chara.

[

78 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

■ Volume Trim C)VOLUME TRIM

Use this feature to adjust the output level of each input

source. This is useful if you want to balance the level of

each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume

when switching between input sources.

Choices: TUNER, PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/

CBL, VCR, DVR, V-AUX, DOCK, MULTI CH

Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

• You can adjust the value for DOCK only when iPod is stationed

to the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit.

• The default name (“DVD” in the display example above) and

the new name (“MY DVD”) of the selected input source

appears in the OSD.

■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE

Decoder select mode

Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for

the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks

when you turn on the power of this unit.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select “AUTO” to if you want this unit to

automatically detect the type of input signals and select

the appropriate decoder mode.

• Select “LAST” to if you want this unit to automatically

select the last decoder mode used for the connected

input source.

DTS decoder prioritize setting

Choices: AUTO, DTS

• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically

detect input signal types and select the appropriate

input mode.

• Select “DTS” if you want this unit to select DTS as the

input mode.

■ Multi channel input settings

E)MULTI CH SET

Use this feature to set the function of the multi channel

input.

BGV BGV

Use this feature to select the video source played in the

background of the sources input from the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks.

Choices: DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR, LAST,

OFF

• Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select

the last selected video source as the background video

source.

• Select “OFF” to set this unit not to play the video

source in the background.

Input channels INPUT CH

Use this setting to select the number of channels input

from an external decoder.

Choices: 6CH, 8CH

• Select “6CH” if you input 6-channel signals.

• Select “8CH” if you input 8-channel signals.

Front input FRONT

If you selected “8CH” in “INPUT CH”, you can select the

analog jacks at which the front signals from an external

decoder will be input.

Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,

DVR, VCR

See page 22 for the connection information.

The “FRONT” parameter appears only when you set “INPUT

CH” to “8CH”.

INPUT MENU

C)VOLUME TRIM

MY DVD

DVD -> 0.0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Adjust

[RETURN]:Exit

[

INPUT MENU

D)DECODER MODE 1/2

. >AUTO LAST

CD ;;;;AUTO

MD/CD-R ;;;;AUTO

DVD ;;;;AUTO

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

Note

INPUT MENU

E)MULTI CH SET

. BGV;;;;; LAST

INPUT CH;;;;;6CH

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

INPUT MENU

E)MULTI CH SET

. BGV;;;;; LAST

INPUT CH;;;;;8CH

FRONT;;; DVD

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

79 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.

■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET

Dimmer DIMMER

Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel

display.

Control range: –

4 to 0

Control step: 1

•Press

l to make the front panel display dimmer.

•Press

h to make the front panel display brighter.

Video conversion VIDEO CONV.

Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals

input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select “ON” to convert composite, S-video and

component video signals interchangeably.

• Select “OFF” not to convert any signals.

• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line

video signals interchangeably.

• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR

OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the

same type of video connections between each component.

• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are

converted to component video signals, the picture quality may

suffer depending on your VCR.

• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video

jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such

cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”.

• When non-standard video signals (such as video signals from a

game console) are input, this unit may not convert the signals

even if you set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”.

OSD shift OSD SHIFT

Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.

Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward)

Control step: 1

Initial setting: 0

• Press

l to raise the position of the OSD.

• Press

h to lower the position of the OSD.

Source feature OSD display time

OSD-SOURCE

Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the

iPod menu in the OSD after you perform a certain

operation.

Choices: ON, 10s, 30s

• Select “ON” to display the OSD continuously during

an operation.

• Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you

perform a certain operation.

• Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you

perform a certain operation.

Amplifier function OSD display time

OSD-AMP

Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the

status and sound field parameters information screen after

you perform a certain operation.

Choices: ON, 10s, 30s

• Select “ON” to display the OSD constantly during an

operation.

• Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you

perform a certain operation.

• Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you

perform a certain operation.

Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL

Use this feature to set whether to display the information

(such as a song title or a channel name) in the front panel

display in a continuous manner or by the first 14

alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once

when “DOCK” is selected as the input source.

Choices: CONT, ONCE

• Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the

front panel display in a continuous manner.

• Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the

front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric

characters after scrolling all characters once.

3 OPTION MENU

Notes

MANUAL SETUP

3 OPTION MENU 1/2

. A)DISPLAY SET

B)MEMORY GUARD

C)AUDIO SELECT

D)PARAM. INI

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

MANUAL SETUP

3 OPTION MENU 2/2

. E)ZONE2 SET

F)DOCK SET

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

OPTION MENU

A)DISPLAY SET 1/2

. DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0

VIDEO CONV.;;;ON

OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

OPTION MENU

A)DISPLAY SET 2/2

. OSD-SOURCE;;;30s

OSD-AMP;;;;;;30s

FL SCROLL;;;CONT

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

80 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other system settings.

Choices: OFF, ON

• Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD”

feature.

• Select “ON” to protect:

– sound field program parameters

– all “SET MENU” items

– all speaker levels

– SCENE template parameters

When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select

and adjust any other “SET MENU” items.

■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT

Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack

select setting for the input sources when you turn on the

power of this unit.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically

detect the type of input signals and select the

appropriate audio input jack select setting.

• Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically

select the last audio input jack select setting used for

the connected input source.

■ Parameter initialization D)PARAM.INI

Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound

field program within a sound field program group. When

you initialize a sound field program group, all of the

parameter values within that group revert to their initial

factory settings.

Press the corresponding sound field program selector

buttons on the remote control to select the sound

field

program that you want to initialize.

An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field

program names that have been changed from their initial

factory settings.

Choices: CLASSICAL, LIVE/CLUB,

ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE, STEREO,

ENHANCER, SUR. DECODE

• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter

settings once you initialize a sound field program group.

• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field

programs.

• You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when

“MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”.

■ Zone 2 settings E)ZONE2 SET

Zone 2 Maximum volume MAX VOL.

Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the

Zone 2.

Control range: 16.5 dB, 15.0 dB to –30.0 dB

Control step: 5.0 dB

• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI VOL.”

setting. For example, when “INI VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and

then “MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is

automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of

this unit next time.

• The “MAX VOL.” setting does not affect the output level at the

“ZONE 2 OUT” jacks.

Note

OPTION MENU

B)MEMORY GUARD

>OFF ON

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

[

OPTION MENU

C)AUDIO SELECT

>AUTO LAST

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

[

Notes

OPTION MENU

D)PARAM. INI

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

*ENTERTAINMENT

*MOVIE

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

ENHANCER

Press DSP Key

OPTION MENU

E)ZONE2 SET

. MAX VOL.;+16.5dB

INI.VOL.;;;;;OFF

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[

81 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Zone 2 Initial volume INI VOL.

Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2 when the

power of this unit is turned on.

Choices: Off, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI VOL.”

setting.

• When you select “FRONT B”, “PRNS” or “NONE” in

“EXTRA SP ASSIGN” (see page 70), “Zone 2 SP Not

Assigned” appears in the OSD and the “ZONE2 SET”

parameter is not available.

• The “INI VOL.” setting does not affect the output level at the

ZONE 2 OUT jacks.

■ iPod universal dock setting F)DOCK SET

Charge on standby STANDBY CHARGE

Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the

battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the

standby mode (see page 56).

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• Select “AUTO” to charge the battery of the stationed

iPod when this unit is turned on and in the standby

mode.

• Select “OFF” to charge the battery of the stationed

iPod only when this unit is turned on.

Notes

OPTION MENU

F)DOCK SET

STANDBY CHARGE:

AUTO

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

[

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

82 En

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha

and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code

for each input source (see page 85).

■ Controlling the input source

components in the SCENE mode

You can operate both this unit and the input source

component by using the remote control. You must set the

appropriate remote control code for each input source in

advance (see page 85).

1 Press the desired

SCENE button on the

remote control.

2 Press the desired buttons in the * area below

to control the input source component of the

selected SCENE template.

These buttons control the input source component. See page 84

for details of the function of each button.

■ Setting the input source of the

customized SCENE template on the

remote control

If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE

template, you must set the input source of the SCENE

template on the remote control to operate the input source

component correctly.

1 Press and hold the

SCENE button and the

desired input selector button (

The transmit indicator (

) flashes twice.

2 Keep holding down the buttons pressed in

step 2 until “OK” appears in the display

window (J) on the remote control.

If the setting of the input source is not successful, “NG”

appears in the display window (

). In this case, repeat the

setting procedure.

Remote control features

Using the remote control for the SCENE feature

Note

AUX/DOCK

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

1234

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

FREQ/TEXT EON MODE- PTY SEEK- START

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

LEVEL

SLEEP

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

NIGHT

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

ENHANCER

MOVIE

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV/CBL

VCR

DVR

DVD

TUNER

MD/CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH IN

POWER

SCENE

POWER

STANDBY

Set to

SOURCE

SCENE

buttons

Note

83 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Controlling this unit

Set the operation mode selector to

AMP to control this

unit.

These buttons always control this unit regardless of the

operation mode selector position.

These buttons control this unit only when the component

operation mode selector is set to

AMP.

■ Controlling a TV

Set the operation mode selector to

TV to control your

TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate

remote control code for DTV/CBL or PHONO (see

page 85). When you set the remote control codes for both

DTV/CBL and PHONO, priority is given to the one set for

DTV/CBL.

These buttons always control your TV regardless of the

operation mode selector position.

These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode

selector is set to

TV. For details, see the “TV” column on

page 84.

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components

Notes

AUX/DOCK

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

1234

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

FREQ/TEXT EON MODE- PTY SEEK- START

VOLUME

TV VOL

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

AND

LEVEL

SLEEP

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

NIGHT

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

ENHANCER

MOVIE

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV/CBL

VCR

DVR

DVD

TUNER

MD/CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH IN

POWER

SCENE

POWER

STANDBY

TV CH

Notes

Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV

TV POWER Turns on or off the power.

TV VOL +/–

Increases or decreases the volume

level.

TV CH +/– Changes the channel number.

TV MUTE Mutes the audio output.

TV INPUT Changes the input source.

AUX/DOCK

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

1234

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

FREQ/TEXT EON MODE- PTY SEEK- START

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

LEVEL

SLEEP

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

NIGHT

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

ENHANCER

MOVIE

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV/CBL

VCR

DVR

DVD

TUNER

MD/CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH IN

POWER

SCENE

POWER

STANDBY

84 En

Remote control features

■ Controlling other components

Set the operation mode selector to

SOURCE to control

other components selected with the input selector buttons

(B), or . You must set the appropriate remote

control code for each input source in advance (see

page 85). The following table shows the function of each

control button used to control other components assigned

to each input selector button (B), or . Be advised

that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected

component.

The remote control has 12 modes (input areas) to control

components so that the remote control can operate up to 12

different components.

This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.

These buttons operate your VCR or DVR when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 85).

Press and hold to search backward or forward.

Simple remote mode (see page 56).

AUX/DOCK

–

––

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

1234

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV/CBL

VCR

DVR

DVD

TUNER

MD/CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH IN

POWER

SCENE

POWER

STANDBY

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

ENT

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

FREQ/TEXT EON MODE-PTY SEEK- START

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

SLEEP

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

NIGHT

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

ENHANCER

MOVIE

DVD player/

DVD

recorder

VCR

Cable TV/

Satellite

tuner

TV LD player CD player

MD recorder/

CD recorder

Tape deck Tuner iPod

1 AV P OW E R

Power

VCR power

Power

2 TITLE

Title Title Title Title Band

3 ENTER

Menu enter Menu select Menu select

Subsequent

PRESET/CH k Menu up Menu up Menu up

Preset up

(1 to 8)

PRESET/CH n Menu down Menu down Menu down

Preset down

(1 to 8)

Down

A/B/C/D/E l Menu left Menu left Menu left

Preset down

(A to E)

A/B/C/D/E h Menu right Menu right Menu right Direction A/B

Preset up

(A to E)

Subsequent

4 RETURN

Return Return Return Return

5 1-9, 0, +10

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

6 ll

backward

DVR search

backward

DVR search

backward

forward

DVR search

forward

DVR search

forward

Skip

backward

DVR skip

backward

DVR skip

backward

Chapter/Skip

backward

Skip

backward

Skip

backward

Direction

back

Skip

backward

a Skip forward

DVR skip

forward

DVR skip

forward

Chapter/Skip

forward

Skip forward Skip forward

Direction

forward

Skip

forward

REC/

DISC SKIP

Disc skip (player)

Rec (recorder)

Rec

DVR rec

Disc skip Rec Rec

s Stop Stop

DVR stop

Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop

e Pause Pause

DVR pause

Pause Pause Pause Pause

Pause

(Play/Pause)

p Play Play

DVR play

Play Play Play Play

Play

(Play/Pause)

7 MENU

Menu Menu Menu

8 AUDIO

Audio Audio

0 DISPLAY

Display Display Display Display Display Display Display

A ENT

Enter Enter/recall Enter

Notes

85 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Selecting a component to be controlled

You can select a component to be controlled

independently of the input source selected with the input

selector buttons.

Press

SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the

desired component.

The name of the component to be controlled appears in the

display window (

) on the remote control.

■ Controlling optional components

(Option mode)

“OPTN” is an optional component control area that can be

programmed with remote control functions independently

from any input source. This area is useful for

programming commands that are to be used only as a part

of a macro function or for components that do not have a

valid remote control code.

To select the option mode, press

SELECT k /

n repeatedly until “OPTN” appears in the display

window (

) on the remote control.

You cannot set a remote control code for the optional area. See

page 87 to program buttons operated within this component

control area.

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for

each input area. For a complete list of available remote

control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at

the end of this manual.

The following table shows the default component

(Library: component category) and the remote control

code for each input area.

Remote control code default settings

You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a

YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above.

In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

SOURCE and then press an input selector

button (

to select the input area

you want to set up.

Note

SELECT

Setting remote control codes

Input area

Library

(component

category)

Manufacturer

Default

code

PHONO TV – –

MULCH CH

DVD YAMAHA 2100

LD YAMAHA 2200

TAPE YAMAHA 2700

V-AU X/

DOCK

TUNER YAMAHA 2606

TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 2602

MD/CD-R CD-R YAMAHA 2400

CD CD YAMAHA 2300

DTV/CBL TV – –

DVR DVR YAMAHA 2807

VCR VCR – –

DVD DVD YAMAHA 2100

Note

AUX/DOCK

DTV/CBL

DVR VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R

PHONO

TUNER

MULTI CH IN

SOURCE

AMP

86 En

Remote control features

2 Press and hold

LEARN for about 3

seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar

object.

The library name (ex. L;DVD) and the name of the

selected input area (ex. DVD) appear alternately in

the display window (

) on the remote control.

• You can set a remote control code of a different type of

component to an input area. Press

l / h repeatedly to

change the library (component category).

Library choices: L;DVD, L;DVR, L;LD, L;CD, L;CDR,

L;MD, L;TAP (tape), L;TUN (tuner),

L;AMP, L;TV, L;CAB (cable),

L;SAT (satellite), L;VCR

• If you want to setup for another input area, press the input

selector button, or , or press

SELECT k / n

repeatedly to select the input area.

• Be sure to press and hold

LEARN for at least 3

seconds, otherwise the learning process will start.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.

3 Press

ENTER.

The four-digit code set for the selected component

appears in the display window (

“0000” appears in the display window (

) if no code has

been set.

4 Press the numeric buttons (

) to enter the

four-digit remote control code for the

component you want to use.

For a complete list of available remote control codes,

refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of

this manual.

5 Press

ENTER to set the number.

“OK” appears in the display window (

) on the

remote control if setting was successful.

“NG” appears in the display window (

) on the

remote control if the setting was unsuccessful. In this

case, start over from step 3.

If you continuously want to set up another code for another

component, press the input selector button (

) or , or

SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then

repeat steps 2 through 5.

6 Press

LEARN again to exit from the setup

mode.

7 Press p or AV POWER to confirm whether

you can control your component using the

remote control.

If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your

component has more than one code, try each of them until

you find the correct one.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (

) on the remote

control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,

or when you press more than one button simultaneously.

• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes

for commercially available audio and video components

(including Yamaha components). If operation is not possible

with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote

control function using the learn feature (see “Programming

codes from other remote controls” on page 87) or use the

remote control supplied with the component.

• Functions programmed using the learn feature take priority over

remote control code functions.

Notes

Note

LEARN

Notes

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

LEARN

POWER

87 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

You can program remote control codes from other remote

controls. Use the learn feature if you want to program

functions not included in the basic operations covered by

the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control

code is not available. You can program the function of

other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas

in the following illustration. The buttons can be

programmed independently for each input area.

The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote

control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most

of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some

special signals or extremely long transmissions. Refer to the

operating instructions for the other remote control.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

SOURCE and then press an input selector

button(B), or to select a an input area.

Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to

SOURCE. When you set the operation mode selector to

AMP and program a remote control codes from other remote

controls, the programmed key cannot operate the amplifier

function of this unit.

2 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm

(2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control

on a flat surface so that their infrared

transmitters are aimed at each other.

3 Press

LEARN using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“LEARN” and the name of the selected input area

(ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window

(

) on the remote control.

• Do not press and hold

LEARN. If you hold it down for

more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control

code setting mode.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, start over from step 3.

4 Press the button for which you want to

program the new function.

“LEARN” appears in the display window (

) on the

remote control.

Programming codes from other

remote controls

Note

AUX/DOCK

–

––

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

1234

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV/CBL

VCR

DVR

DVD

TUNER

MD/CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH IN

POWER

SCENE

POWER

STANDBY

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDI O

TITLE

ENT

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

FREQ/TEXT EON MODE- PTY SEEK- START

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

SLEEP

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

NIGHT

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

ENHANCER

MOVIE

Notes

AUX/DOCK

1234

SELECT

DTV/CBL

VCR

DVR

DVD

TUNER

MD/CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH IN

POWER

SCENE

POWER

STANDBY

5 to 10 cm

Other remote control

LEARN

88 En

Remote control features

5 Press and hold the button you want to

program on the other remote control until

“OK” appears in the display window (

) on

the remote control.

“NG” appears in the display window (

) on the

remote control if learning was unsuccessful. In this

case, start over from step 4.

• If you want to program another function, repeat steps 4

and 5.

• If you continuously want to program another function for

another component, press

SELECT k / n to select the

component, and then repeat steps 4 and 5.

6 Press

LEARN again to exit the learning

mode.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (J) on the remote

control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,

or when you press more than one button simultaneously.

• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.

However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may

appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this

case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room

for further learning.

• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:

– when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other

components are weak.

– when the distance between the two remote controls is too

great or too small.

– when the remote control infrared windows are not facing each

other at the appropriate angle.

– when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.

– when the function to be programmed is continuous or

uncommon.

You can change the name of the input source that appears

in the display window (

) on the remote control if you

want to use a different name than the factory preset. This

feature is useful when you have set an input area to control

a different component.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

SOURCE and then press an input selector

button (B), or to select the input area

you want to rename.

The name of the selected input area appears in the

display window (

2 Press

RENAME using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled.

In this case, start over from step 2.

Notes

AUX/DOCK

1234

SELECT

DTV/CBL

VCR

DVR

DVD

TUNER

MD/CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH IN

POWER

SCENE

POWER

STANDBY

Other remote control

LEARN

Changing source names in the

display window

Note

AUX/DOCK

DTV/CBL

DVR VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R

PHONO

TUNER

MULTI CH IN

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

RENAME

89 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

3 Press

k / n to select and enter a character.

Pressing

n changes the character as follows:

A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon),

/ (slash), and space.

Pressing

k changes the characters in reverse order.

4 Press

h to move the cursor to the next

position.

Press

l to move the cursor to the previous position.

5 Press

ENTER to set the new name.

“OK” appears in the display window (

) on the

remote control if renaming was successful.

“NG” appears in the display window(

) on the

remote control if renaming was unsuccessful. In this

case, start over from step 3.

If you continuously want to rename another input area, press

the input selector button (

), , or , or press

SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then

repeat steps 3 through 5.

6 Press RENAME again to exit the renaming

mode.

“ERROR” appears in the display window (

) on the remote

control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,

or when you press more than one button simultaneously.

This feature is useful when you change the input or output

assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks.

Refer to “Input rename” on page 77.

The macro programming feature makes it possible to

perform a series of operations with the press of a single

button. For example, when you want to play a CD,

normally you would turn on the components, select the

CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The

macro programming feature lets you perform all of these

operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The

buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with

macro programs. You can also program your own macros

(see page 91).

■ MACRO operations

1 Set the

MACRO ON/OFF selector to ON.

2 Press the desired macro button.

3 Set the

MACRO ON/OFF selector to OFF

when you finish to using the macro

programming operation.

• While the remote control is running a macro program, it does

not accept any other operation until it has completed running

the program (the transmission indicator stops flashing).

• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro

is operating until the macro operation is complete.

Note

ENTER

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/CH

ENTER

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/CH

RENAME

Macro programming features

Notes

AUX/DOCK

1234

DTV/CBL

VCR

DVR

DVD

TUNER

MD/CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH IN

POWER

SCENE

POWER

STANDBY

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

FREQ/TEXT EON MODE- PTY SEEK- START

Macro buttons

MACRO ON/OFF MACRO

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

MACRO

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

MACRO

90 En

Remote control features

■ Default macro functions

You can turn on some components (including Yamaha components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC OUTLETS

on the rear panel of this unit. Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component.

For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.

When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV/CBL or PHONO (see page 85), you can turn on the power of your

TV without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV/CBL takes priority over the one for PHONO.

When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode.

Playback can be started for any Yamaha remote control-compatible CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD recorder. When

using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the input area of that component (see

page 87) or set a remote control code (see page 85).

Pressing

macro button

To automatically transmit these signals in order

First Second Third

—

(*1)

—

(MD/CD-R area) (*4)

(CD area) (*4)

—

(DVR area) (*4)

(VCR area) (*4)

(DVD area) (*4)

STANDBY STANDBY

POWER

(*1)

POWER

(*2)

PHONO

POWER

PHONO

MULCH CH IN

AUX/DOC

TUNE

(*3)

MD/CD-

CD CD

DTV/CBL DTV/CBL

DVR DVR

VCR VCR

DVD DVD

91 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Programming macro operations

You can program your own macro and use the macro

programming feature to transmit several remote control

commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to

set up remote control codes or perform learning operations

before programming the macro.

• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is

programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again

when the programmed macro is cleared.

• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default

macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.

• We do not recommend programming continuous operations

such as volume control in a macro.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

SOURCE and then press

MACRO using

a ballpoint pen or similar object.

“MCR ?” appears in the display window (

) on the

remote control.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the macro programming mode will be

automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.

2 Press the macro button you want to use to

operate the macro.

The macro button name (ex. “M;DVD”) and the

selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear

alternately in the display window (

) on the remote

control.

“AGAIN” appears in the display window (

) if you press a

button other than a macro button.

3 Press the buttons for the functions you want

to include in the macro operation in

sequence.

You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you

have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote

control automatically exits the macro mode. The

following example is for programming the following

procedure:

Step 1 (“MCR 1”): Press POWER.

Step 2 (“MCR 2”): Press DVD.

Step 3 (“MCR 3”): Press STRAIGHT.

To change the selected input area, press

SELECT k / n

Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step,

whereas

SELECT k / n

only changes the selected input

area.

4 Press

MACRO again using a ballpoint pen

or similar object when the operation

sequence you want to program is complete.

“ERROR” appears in the display window (

) if you press

more than one button simultaneously.

Notes

Note

MACRO

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

AUX/DOCK

DTV/CBL

VCR

DVR

DVD

TUNER

MD/CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH IN

POWER

STANDBY

Note

AUX/DOCK

1234

DTV/CBL

VCR

DVR

DVD

TUNER

MD/CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH IN

POWER

SCENE

POWER

STANDBY

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDIO

TITLE

RETURN

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

Indicates the

number of macro

steps entered

Flashes alternately so you can

set the next step

MCR 2: DVD

MCR 1: POWER

MCR 3: STRAIGHT

92 En

Remote control features

You can clear all changes made in each function set, such

as learned functions, macros, renamed input area names

and setup remote control ID.

■ Clearing function sets

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

SOURCE and then press

CLEAR by

using a ballpoint pen or similar object.

“CLEAR” appears in the display window (

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled.

In this case, start over from step 1.

2 Press

k / n to select the clear mode.

L;CD (etc.) (L; Name of an input area)

Clears all learned functions in the respective

input area. The name of a component is shown

after a semicolon (;). Press an input selector

button to select the input area.

L;AMP Clears all learned functions for controlling the

amplifier functions of this unit.

L;ALL Clears all learned functions.

M;ALL Clears all programmed macros.

RNAME Clears all renamed source names.

FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the

remote to the factory settings.

3 Press and hold

CLEAR again for about 3

seconds.

“WAIT” appears in the display window (

). If

clearing was successful, “C;OK” appears in the

display window (

) on the remote control.

Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the

button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer

setting, if you have set remote control codes).

• “L;ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to

complete.

• “C;NG” appears in the display window (

) if clearing

was unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 2.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (

) if you press

a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press

more than one button simultaneously.

Clearing configurations

Note

CLEAR

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

Notes

CLEAR

93 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Clearing a learned function

You can clear the function learned for a certain button in

each control area.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

SOURCE and then press an input selector

button(B), or to select the input area

containing the function you want to clear.

The selected component name appears in the display

window (J).

2 Press

CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“LEARN” and the selected component name

(ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window

(

• Do not press and hold

LEARN. If you hold it down for

more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote

control code setting mode.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.

3 Press and hold

CLEAR using a ballpoint

pen or similar object and then press the

button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.

“C;OK” appears in the display window (

) if

clearing was successful. Once “C;OK” appears in the

display window (

) on the remote control, release

the ballpoint pen or similar object used to press

CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote

control returns to the learning mode.

• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat

step 3.

• If you continuously want to clear another function for

another component, press

SELECT k / n to select the

input area, then repeat step 3.

• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the

factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have

set remote control codes).

4 Press

LEARN again to exit.

• “C;NG” appears in the display window (

) on the remote

control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over

from step 2.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (

) on the

remote control if you press more than one button

simultaneously.

Notes

AUX/DOCK

DTV/CBL

VCR

DVR

DVD

TUNER

MD/CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH IN

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

LEARN

Notes

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MODE- PTY SEEK-START

94 En

Remote control features

■ Clearing a macro function

You can clear the function programmed for a certain

macro button.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

SOURCE and then press

MACRO using

a ballpoint pen or similar object.

“MCR ?” appears in the display window (

) on the

remote control.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the macro programming mode will be

automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.

2 Press and hold

CLEAR using a ballpoint

pen or similar object, then press the macro

button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.

“C;OK” appears in the display window (

) on the

remote control if clearing was successful.

• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat

step 2.

• Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts

to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you

have set remote control codes).

3 Press

MACRO again to exit the macro

programming mode.

• “C;NG” appears in the display window (

) on the remote

control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from

step 2.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (

) on the remote

control if you press more than one button simultaneously.

Note

MACRO

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

AMP

Notes

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

AUX/DOCK

DTV/CBL

VCR

DVR

DVD

TUNER

MD/CD-R

USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION

95 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone 2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce

separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone 2). You can control this unit from the second zone

using the supplied remote control.

You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:

• An infrared signal receiver in the second zone.

• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the

infrared signal receiver in the second zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone.

• An amplifier and speakers in the second zone.

• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with

your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone 2 connections that best meet your requirements.

• Some Yamaha models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to

use an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown below.

■ Using the external amplifier

Connect the amplifier/receiver in the second zone and other components to this unit as follows.

To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.

Using multi-zone configuration

Only analog signals are sent to the second zone. Any source you want to listen to in the second zone must be

connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.

Connecting Zone 2

Note

OUTOUT

REMOTE

OUT

REMOTE

This unit

Yamaha

component

Yamaha

component

Infrared signal

receiver

Infrared signal emitter

DVD player

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal receiver

Second zone

(Zone 2)

Main zone

This unit

From the ZONE 2 OUT jacks

From the REMOTE OUT jacks

From the REMOTE IN jacks

96 En

Using multi-zone configuration

■ Using the internal amplifier of this unit

Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA SP speaker terminals and then set the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to

“ZONE2” (see page 70).

• You can use the FRONT B speakers as the front speaker system of another zone. Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B” and then

“FRONT B” to “ZONE B” (see page 70).

• When you use the internal amplifiers for the Zone 2 speakers, you can adjust the volume level and set the initial volume level and

maximum volume level of the Zone 2 speakers (see page 80).

You can select and control Zone 2 by using the control

buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. The

available operations are as follows:

• Selecting the input source of Zone 2

• Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as

the input source of Zone 2 (see page 50)

• Enjoying music stored on your iPod stationed in a

Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold

separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this

unit when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source

(see page 56)

You must complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is

flashing in the front panel display. Otherwise, the Zone 2 mode is

automatically canceled and this unit returns to the normal

operation mode. In this case, repeat the Zone 2 selection

procedure.

■ Controlling Zone 2 with the front panel

Turning on Zone 2

Press

ZONE 2 ON/OFF to turn on Zone 2.

ZONE 2 ON/OFF is operational only when

MASTER

ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

Once

MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward

to the ON position, you can also press

POWER or

STANDBY on the remote control to turn on the main zone and

Zone 2 or set them to the standby mode.

Activating the Zone 2 operation mode

Press

ZONE CONTROL to control Zone 2.

The ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front panel display for

approximately 10 seconds.

Important safety notice

The EXTRA SP speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or

more than one loudspeaker per channel.

Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low

impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.

Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This

information is found on the back panel of your Receiver.

Controlling Zone 2

FRONT B/ZONE2/

PRESENCE

EXTRA SP

Second zone

(Zone 2)

This unit

Main zone

Note

ZONE2

Flashes

97 En

Using multi-zone configuration

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Operating Zone 2

Rotate the

INPUT selector to select the

desired input source while the ZONE2 indicator

is flashing in the front panel display.

• Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the TUNER

features in Zone 2. For details about the TUNER

operations, see “FM/AM tuning” on page 50.

• Select “V-AUX” as the input source to use iPod

features in Zone 2. For details about the iPod

operations, see “Using iPod™” on page 56.

You must complete this step within 10 seconds while the selected

zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently

selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press

ZONE CONTROL on the front panel again.

Set Zone 2 to the standby mode

Press

ZONE 2 ON/OFF to set Zone 2 to the

standby mode.

■ Controlling Zone 2 with the remote

control

Activating the Zone 2 operation mode

Set the operation mode selector to

AMP and

then press

SELECT k repeatedly to select the

zone you want to control.

“ZONE 2” is displayed in the display window (

) on the

remote control.

Turning on or off Zone 2 using the remote control

POWER and

STANDBY on the remote control

work differently depending on the selected zone that

appears in the display window (

) on the remote control.

• When the main zone, Zone 2 mode is selected, you can

turn on the main zone or Zone 2 or set them to the

standby mode individually.

• When the all mode is selected, pressing

POWER

turns on the main zone and Zone 2 simultaneously and

pressing

STANDBY sets them to the standby mode

simultaneously.

• When the remote control is in the main zone mode, “MAIN”

appears for a few seconds when

POWER or

STANDBY

is pressed.

• “ALL” appears in the display window (J) on the remote

control only when SELECT n is pressed.

Selecting the input source of Zone 2

Press one of the input selector buttons (

) to

select the input source of the selected zone.

If the remote control is used to select the input source, “2;

name of the selected input area” is displayed in the display

window (

) on the remote control when Zone 2 is

selected respectively.

The selected input source is shared across all zones.

Operate the following operations after activating the Zone 2

operation mode.

SELECT

SOURCE

AMP

Control mode

Display window

(J)

POWER

and

STANDBY

Main zone

mode

Name of the selected

input area

Turns on the main

zone only or sets it to

the standby mode.

Zone 2 mode

“ZONE 2” or “2;name

of the selected input

area”

Turns on Zone 2 or

sets it to the standby

mode.

All mode

“ALL”

POWER: turns

on the main zone and

Zone 2.

STANDBY: sets

the main zone and

Zone 2 to the standby

mode.

Notes

Note

ADVANCED SETUP

98 En

This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional

operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each

parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.

• The settings you make are reflected next time you press

MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see

page 25).

•Only

MASTER ON/OFF,

TONE CONTROL and the

PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced

setup menu.

• No other operations can be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.

• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.

1 Press

MASTER ON/OFF on the front

panel to release it outward to the OFF

position to turn off this unit.

2 Press and hold

TONE CONTROL and

then press

MASTER ON/OFF inward to

the ON position to turn on this unit.

This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu

appears in the front panel display.

3 Rotate the

PROGRAM selector to select

the parameter you want to adjust.

The name of the selected parameter appears in the

front panel display.

See page 99 for a complete list of available

parameters.

4 Press

TONE CONTROL repeatedly to

change the selected parameter setting.

5 Press

MASTER ON/OFF to release it

outward to the OFF position to save the new

setting and turn off this unit.

The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on

this unit.

Advanced setup

Notes

Using the advanced setup

TONE CONTROL

MASTER

OFF

While holding

down

SPIMP.-8MIN

Currently selected

parameter setting

Currently selected

parameter

99 En

Advanced setup

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Speaker impedance SP IMP.

Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit

so that it matches that of your speakers.

Choices: 8Ω MIN, 6Ω MIN

•Select “8Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω .

• Select “6Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω .

The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems

(A and B) simultaneously when “SP IMP.” is set to “8Ω MIN”.

■ User presets PRESET

Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to

the initial factory settings (see page 109).

Choices: CANCEL, RESET

• Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this

unit.

• Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit.

• This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit

including the “SET MENU” parameters.

• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on

this unit.

■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP

Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote

control recognition. This feature is useful when you

operate this unit and the other Yamaha receivers/

amplifiers in the same room separately.

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID code is

set to “2001”.

• Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID code is

set to “2002”.

Setting remote control AMP ID codes

You need to set the remote control AMP ID code for the

remote control.

1 Set the operation mode selector to

AMP or

SOURCE.

2 Press and hold

LEARN for about 3

seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar

object and then press

l / h repeatedly

until “L;AMP” appears in the display window

(

) on the remote control.

• Be sure to press and hold

LEARN for at least 3

seconds, otherwise the learning process will start.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.

3 Press

ENTER.

The four-digit code set for the selected input area

appears in the display window (

) on the remote

control.

See page 98 for the operation of the advanced setup.

SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level

8Ω MIN

Front

If you use one set (A or B),

the impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

If you use two sets (A and

B), the impedance of each

speaker must be 16 Ω or

higher.

Center

The impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

Surround

Surround back

6Ω MIN

Front

If you use one set (A or B),

the impedance of each

speaker must be 4 Ω or

higher.

If you use two sets (A and

B), the impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

Center

The impedance of each

speaker must be 6 Ω or

higher.

Surround

Surround back

Notes

LEARN

ENTER

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/CH

APPENDIX

■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Fernbedienung/Fjärrkontrollen

Afstandsbediening/Пульт ДУ

AUX/DOCK

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDIO

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

1234

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

FREQ/TEXT EON MODE- PTY SEEK- START

VOLUME

TV VOL

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

AND

LEVEL

SLEEP

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

NIGHT

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

ENHANCER

MOVIE

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV/CBL

VCR

DVR

DVD

TUNER

MD/CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH IN

POWER

SCENE

POWER

STANDBY

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

NIGHT

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

ENHANCER

MOVIE

iii

List of remote control codes

Liste des codes de commande

Liste der Fernbedienungscodes

Lista över fjärrstyrningskoder

Lijst met afstandsbedieningscodes

Список кодов дистанционного управления

CABLE

ABC 0030, 0035

AMERICAST 0926

BELL SOUTH 0926

BIRMINGHAM CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

0303

BRITISH TELECOM

0030

CABLE & WIRELESS

1095

DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904,

1904

DIRECTOR 0503

FILMNET 0470

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

0030, 0303, 0503,

0837,

GOLDSTAR 0171

HAMLIN 0036, 0300

JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503,

0837

LG 0171

MNET 0470

MEMOREX 0027

MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837,

1133

NTL 1095

NOOS 0844

ONO 1095

PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX

0030

PACE 0264, 1087, 1095

PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134

PARAGON 0027

PHILIPS 0332, 0344

PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904,

1904

PULSAR 0027

QUASAR 0027

REGAL 0300, 0306

RUNCO 0027

SAGEM 0844

SAMSUNG 0027, 0171

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

0035, 0504, 0904,

1904

SONY 1033

STARCOM 0030

SUPERCABLE

0303

TS 0030

TELE+1 0470

TELEWEST 1095

TORX 0030

TOSHIBA 0027

TRANS PX 0303

UNITED CABLE

0030

ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926

CD PLAYER

AIWA 0184

ARCAM 0184

AUDIO RESEARCH

0184

AUDIO TON 0184

AUDIOLAB 0184

AUDIOMECA 0184

CAIRN 0184

CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS

0056

CARVER 0184, 0206

CYRUS 0184

DKK 0027

DMX ELECTRONICS

0184

DENON 0900

DYNAMIC BASS

0206

EMERSON 0332

FISHER 0206

GENEXXA 0059, 0332

GOODMANS 0332

GRUNDIG 0184

HARMAN/KARDON

0184, 0200

HITACHI 0059

JVC 0099

KENWOOD 0055, 0064

KRELL 0184

LXI 0332

LINN 0184

MCS 0056

MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332

MARANTZ 0056, 0184

MATSUI 0184

MEMOREX 0332

MERIDIAN 0184

MICROMEGA 0184

MIRO 0027

MISSION 0184

MYRYAD 0184

NAD 0027

NSM 0184

NAIM 0184

OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064,

0206, 0332

PANASONIC 0056

PHILIPS 0184

PIONEER 0059, 0332

POLK AUDIO 0184

PROTON 0184

QED 0184

QUAD 0184

QUASAR 0056

RCA 0059, 0206, 0332

REALISTIC 0206

REVOX 0184

ROTEL 0184

SAE 0184

SANSUI 0184, 0332

SANYO 0206

SCOTT 0332

SEARS 0332

SHARP 0064

SIMAUDIO 0184

SONIC FRONTIERS

0184

SONY 0027

SYMPHONIC 0332

TAG MCLAREN

0184

TANDY 0059

TECHNICS 0056

THORENS 0184

THULE 0184

UNIVERSUM 0184

VICTOR 0099

WARDS 0184

YAMAHA 2300, 2301

CD RECORDER

KENWOOD 0653

MARANTZ 0653

PHILIPS 0653

YAMAHA 2400

DVD PLAYER

ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS

0757

ALBA 0744

AMSTRAD 0740

APEX DIGITAL

0699, 0744, 0782,

0821, 0823, 0857,

1127

BLAUPINKT 0744

BLUE PARADE

0598

BUSH 0740

CENTREX 0699

CLATRONIC 0815

CYBERHOME

0741

DVD2000 0548

DAEWOO 0811, 0797

DANSAI 0797

DECCA 0797

DENON 0517

DIAMOND 0795

DIGITREX 0699

EMERSON 0618

ENTERPRISE 0618

FISHER 0697

GE 0549, 0744

GO VIDEO 0742

GOLDSTAR 0768

GRADIENTE 0678

GREENHILL 0744

GRUNDIG 0566

HITACHI 0600, 0691

HITEKER 0699

JVC 0585, 0650

KLH 0744

KENWOOD 0517, 0561

KOSS 0678

LG 0768

LIMIT 0795

MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702

MARANTZ 0566

MEMOREX 0858

MICO 0750

MICROSOFT 0549

MINTEK 0744

MITSUBISHI 0548

MUSTEK 0757

NESA 0744

ONKYO 0530

ORITRON 0678

PALSONIC 0699

PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389

PHILIPS 0530, 0566, 0673,

0881

PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658,

0659

POLK AUDIO 0566

PROSCAN 0549

QWESTAR 0678

RCA 0549, 0598, 0744

ROTEL 0650

SM ELECTRONIC

0757

SAMSUNG 0600

SANYO 0697

SHARP 0657

SHERWOOD 0797

SHINSONIC 0560

SLIM ART 0811

SONY 0560, 0891

SYLVANIA 0702

TATUNG 0797

TEAC 0598, 0744

TECHNICS 0517

THETA DIGITAL

0598

THOMSON 0549

TOSHIBA 0530

URBAN CONCEPTS

0530

XBOX 0549

YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572,

2100

ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768

ZEUS 0811

DVD RECORDER

HITACHI 2815

PANASONIC 2800

PHILIPS 2808

PIONEER 2804

TOSHIBA 2803

YAMAHA 2807

APPENDIX

LD PLAYER

CARVER 0091

DENON 0086

MARANTZ 0091

MITSUBISHI 0086

NAD 0086

NAGSMI 0086

OPTIMUS 0086

PHILIPS 0091

PIONEER 0086

SALORA 0091

SONY 0228

TELEFUNKEN

0086

YAMAHA 2200

MD RECORDER

KENWOOD 0708

ONKYO 0895

SHARP 0888

SONY 0517

YAMAHA 2500, 2501, 2502

RECEIVER (TUNER)

ADC 0558

AIWA 0185, 1116, 1415,

1432, 1668

ALCO 1417

ANAM 1636

APEX DIGITAL

1284

AUDIOLAB 1216

AUDIOTRONIC

1216

AUDIOVOX 1417

BOSE 1256

CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS

1397

CAPETRONIC

0558

CARVER 1116, 1216

CENTREX 1284

DENON 1387

FERGUSON 0558

FINE ARTS 1216

GRUNDIG 1216

HARMAN/KARDON

0137, 1331

INTEGRA 0162, 1325

JBL 0137, 1333

JVC 0101, 0558, 1401,

1522

KLH 1417, 1439

KENWOOD 1054, 1340

MCS 0066

MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216,

1296,

MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216,

1316

MICROMEGA 1216

MUSICMAGIC

1116

MYRYAD 1216

NAD 0347

NORCENT 1416

ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325

OPTIMUS 0558, 1050

PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545,

1790

PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293,

1295, 1296, 1310,

1316

PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050,

1411

POLK AUDIO 1316

PROSCAN 1281

QUASAR 0066

RCA 0558, 1050, 1281,

1417, 1636,

SABA 0558

SANSUI 1116

SCHNEIDER 0558

SONY 0185, 1085, 1185,

1685, 1785

STEREOPHONICS

1050

SUNFIRE 1340

TEAC 1417

TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336,

1545

TELEFUNKEN

0558

THOMSON 1281

THORENS 1216

UHER 0558

VENTURER 1417

VICTOR 0101

WARDS 0041, 0185

YAMAHA 0203, 1203, 1358,

2601

(TUNER ID1) 2602

(TUNER ID2) 2603

(iPod) 2606

SATELLITE TUNER

@SAT 1327

ABSAT 0150

ALBA 0482

ALPHASTAR 0799

AMSTRAD 0874

ASTON 0169, 1156

ASTRO 0200

ATSAT 1327

AVALON 0423

BLAUPUNKT 0200

BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING

0874, 1202

CANAL DIGITAL

0880

CANAL SATELLITE

0880

CANAL+ 0880

CHAPARRAL 0243

CITYCOM 1203

CONNEXIONS

0423

CROSSDIGITAL

1136

CYRUS 0227

D-BOX 0750, 1154

DMT 1102

DNT 0227, 0423

DAERYUNG 0423

DAEWOO 1323

DIGENIUS 0326

DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593,

0666, 0751, 0776,

0846, 1103, 1136,

1169, 1776, 1883

DISH NETWORK SYSTEM

0802, 1032

DISHPRO 0802, 1032

DISTRATEL 0111

DREAM MULTIMEDIA

1264

ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637,

0802, 0880, 0898,

1032, 1113

ENGEL 1044

EXPRESSVU 0802

FTE 0890

FINLUX 0482

FRACARRO 0898

FUBA 0423

GE 0593

GOI 0802

GALAXIS 0890, 1138

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

0896

GOLD BOX 0880

GRUNDIG 0200, 0874

HTS 0802

HIRSCHMANN

0200, 0423

HITACHI 0482, 0846

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM

0776, 1169, 1776

HUMAX 0890, 1203

INVIDEO 0898

JVC 0802

KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227,

0276, 0685, 1248

KREISELMEYER

0200

LABGEAR 1323

LOGIX 1044

LORENZEN 0326

MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751

MANHATTAN

0482, 1044, 1110

MARANTZ 0227

MEDIASAT 0880

MEMOREX 0751

METRONIC 0111

MITSUBISHI 0776

MOTOROLA 0896

MYRYAD 0227

NEXT LEVEL 0896

NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778,

1154, 1250, 1750

OCTALTV 1032

ORBITECH 1127

PACE 0482, 0874, 1202,

1350

PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874,

1347

PANDA 0482

PAYSAT 0751

PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482,

0749, 0751, 0776,

0880, 1103, 1169,

1776

PIONEER 0880

PROMAX 0482

PROSCAN 0419, 0593

RCA 0170, 0419, 0593,

0882

RFT 0227

RADIOSHACK

0896

RADIOLA 0227

RADIX 0423

SKY 0874, 0883, 1202

SM ELECTRONIC

1227

SABRE 0482

SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280

SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303,

1319

SAT CONTROL

1327

SATSTATION 1110

SCHWAIGER 1138

SEEMANN 0423

SIEMENS 0200

SONY 0666, 0874, 1666

STAR CHOICE

0896

STRONG 1327

TPS 0847, 1280

TANTEC 0482

TECHNISAT 1126, 1127

TELESTAR 1127

THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073,

1318

TOPFIELD 1233

TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776

ULTIMATETV

0419, 0666

UNIDEN 0749, 0751

UNIVERSUM 0200

VENTANA 0227

WISI 0200, 0423, 0482

XSAT 0150

ZEHNDER 1102

ZENITH 0883, 1883

TAPE DECK

AIWA 0056

CARVER 0056

GRUNDIG 0056

HARMAN/KARDON

0056

MAGNAVOX 0056

MARANTZ 0056

MYRYAD 0056

OPTIMUS 0054

PHILIPS 0056

PIONEER 0054

POLK AUDIO 0056

RCA 0054

REVOX 0056

SANSUI 0056

SONY 0270

THORENS 0056

WARDS 0054

YAMAHA 2700,2701

AGB 0543

AOC 0036, 0057, 0087,

0119, 0120, 0135,

0205, 0207, 0478

ASA 0131

AWA 0036

ACURA 0036

ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680

ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490

ADVENT 0788

AIKO 0119

AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235,

0388, 0543, 0729,

0839

AKURA 0291

ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398,

0695

AMERICA ACTION 0207

AMPRO 0778

AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198,

0398, 0439, 0460,

0543

ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277

ANAM NATIONAL

0277, 0677

ANITECH 0036

APEX DIGITAL

0775, 0792, 0794

AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136

BANG & OLUFSEN

0592

BASIC 0036

BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539

BAYSONIC 0207

BEAUMARK 0205

BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741,

0742

BELL & HOWELL

0181

BEON 0064

BLAUPUNKT 0222

BLUE SKY 0695, 1064

BONDSTEC 0274

BRADFORD 0207

BRANDT 0136, 0362

BROKSONIC 0263, 0490

BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398,

0401, 0695, 1064

CCE 0064

CGE 0274

CTC 0274

CXC 0207

CANDLE 0057

CARNIVALE 0057

CARVER 0081, 0197

CASCADE 0036

CATHAY 0064

CELEBRITY 0027

CELERA 0792

CENTURION 0064

CHANGHONG

0792

CHING TAI 0036, 0119

CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119,

0207

CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207

CIMLINE 0036

CINERAL 0119, 0478

CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119

CLARION 0207

CLARIVOX 0064

CLATRONIC 0274, 0397

CONDOR 0347, 0397

CONRAC 0835

CONTEC 0036, 0207

CRAIG 0207

CROSLEY 0081

CROWN 0036, 0064, 0207,

0397, 0445

CURTIS MATHES

057, 0074, 0081,

0087, 0120, 0172,

0181, 0193, 0478,

0729, 1174, 1374

DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064,

0119, 0135, 0181,

0197, 0205, 0207,

0401, 0478, 0650,

0661, 1688

DANSAI 0064

DAYTON 0036

DE GRAAF 0235, 0575

DECCA 0064, 0543

DENON 0172

DIGATRON 0064

DIXI 0036, 0064

DUMONT 0044

DWIN 0747, 0801

ECE 0064

ELBE 0286

ELECTROBAND

0027

ELIN 0064, 0575

ELITE 0347

ELTA 0036

EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207,

0263, 0388, 0490,

0650

ENVISION 0057,0840

EPSON 0860

ERRES 0064

ETHER 0036, 0057

ETRON 0036

EUROPHON 0543

FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136,

0265, 0314, 0362,

0587

FIDELITY 0388

FINLANDIA 0235, 0373

FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132,

0373, 0543

FIRSTAR 0036, 0263

FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695

FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235,

0397

FLINT 0482

FORMENTI 0064, 0347

FORTRESS 0120

FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291

FUJITSU 0710, 0836

FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291

FUTURETECH

0207

GE 0057, 0074, 0078,

0119, 0205, 0207,

0478, 0587, 1174,

1374, 1481

GEC 0064, 0543

GATEWAY 1782, 1783

GELOSO 0036

GENEXXA 0190

GIBRALTER 0044, 0057

GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136,

0181, 0205, 0404

GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401,

0661

GOREMJE 0397

GRADIENTE 0080, 0197

GRAETZ 0190, 0388

GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366,

0543

GRANDIN 0637

GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514,

0583, 0614

GRUNPY 0207

HCM 0036, 0439

HALLMARK 0205

HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207

HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388,

0455, 0583

HANTAREX 0543

HARMAN/KARDON

0081

HARVARD 0207

HAVERMY 0120

HELLO KITTY

0478

HINARI 0036, 0064

HISAWA 0482

HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119,

0132, 0136, 0172,

0190, 0205, 0252,

0383, 0508, 0575,

0605, 1172, 1283

HUA TUN 0036

HUANYU 0401

HYPSON 0064, 0291

ICE 0291, 0398

ITS 0398

ITT 0190, 0388, 0575

IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445

INDIANA 0064

INFINITY 0081

INGELEN 0190

INNO HIT 0543

INNOVA 0064

INTEQ 0044

INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274,

0388, 0539

INTERVISION

0064, 0291, 0404

JBL 0081

JCB 0027

JVC 0080, 0398, 0490,

0680, 0710

JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119,

0183, 0263

JENSEN 0788

KEC 0207

KTV 0057, 0207

KAISUI 0036

KAPSCH 0190

KARCHER 0637

KATHREIN 0583

KENDO 0064

KENWOOD 0057

KNEISSEL 0286, 0462

KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207

KORPEL 0064

KOYODA 0036

L&S ELECTRONIC

0835

LG 0057, 0064, 0087,

0135, 0205, 0741

LXI 0074, 0081, 0181,

0183, 0205

LEYCO 0064, 0291

LIESENK & TTER

0064

LOEWE 0539

LUXOR 0383, 0388

M ELECTRONIC

0036, 0064, 0131,

0132, 0136, 0190,

0314, 0373, 0401,

0507

MGA 0057, 0177, 0205

MTC 0057, 0087, 0539

MAGNADYNE

0274, 0543

MAGNAFON 0543

MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281,

1481

MANESTH 0291, 0347

MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081,

0583

MARK 0064

MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235,

0398, 0514, 0543

MATSUSHITA

0277, 0677

MEDIATOR 0064

MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064

MEGATRON 0172, 0205

MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181,

0205, 0277, 0490,

1064

METZ 0474

MICROMAXX

0835

MICROSTAR 0835

MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078

MINERVA 0514

MINOKA 0439

MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135,

0177, 0181, 0205,

0207, 0263, 0277,

0539, 0863, 1277

MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543,

0636

MOTOROLA 0120

MULTITECH 0036, 0207

MYRYAD 0583

NAD 0183, 0205, 0388,

0893

NEC 0036, 0057, 0078,

0181, 0183, 0197,

0205, 0482, 0524,

1731

NEI 0064

NTC 0119

NECKERMANN

0064, 0583

NETSAT 0064

NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120,

0205

NIKKAI 0064, 0291

NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205

NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507,

0575, 0658

NORCENT 0775, 0851

NORDMENDE

0136, 0314, 0587

OCEANIC 0190, 0388

ONWA 0207, 0460

OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277,

0677

OPTONICA 0120

ORION 0064, 0263, 0347,

0490, 0543

OSAKI 0291, 0439

OTTO VERSAND

0064, 0347, 0539,

0583

PALLADIUM 0397, 0445

PANAMA 0291

PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081,

0190, 0277, 0677,

1437

PATHE CINEMA

0265, 0347

PAUSA 0036

PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078,

0087, 0183, 0205,

1374

PERDIO 0347

PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081,

0172, 0205, 0207,

0274, 0490, 1688

PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064,

0078, 0081, 0119,

0135, 0205, 0401,

0583, 0717, 1481

PHONOLA 0064

PILOT 0057

APPENDIX

PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193,

0314, 0706, 0787,

0893

PORTLAND 0119

PRANDONI-PRINCE

0543

PRIMA 0788

PRISM 0078

PROFEX 0036, 0388

PROSCAN 0074

PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274,

0291, 0445, 0695

PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205

PULSAR 0044

QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677

QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388,

0539

R-LINE 0064

RCA 0027, 0057, 0074,

0117, 0119, 0205,

0706, 1074, 1174,

1274, 1374, 1474,

1481, 1574

RFT 0455

RADIOSHACK

0057, 0074, 0181,

0205, 0207

RADIOLA 0064

RADIOMARELLI

0543

REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205,

0207

REDIFFUSION

0388

REOC 0741

REVOX 0064

REX 0190, 0286, 0291

ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445

RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524,

0630

SBR 0064

SEG 0291, 0695

SEI 0543

SKY 0064

SSS 0207

SABA 0136, 0190, 0314,

0362

SACCS 0265

SAGEM 0637

SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543

SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388,

0575

SAMBERS 0543

SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119,

0120, 0181, 0198,

0205, 0677, 1782

SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064,

0087, 0117, 0119,

0181, 0205, 0291,

0397, 0583, 0614,

0645, 0729, 0793,

0839, 0841

SANSEI 0478

SANSUI 0490

SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207,

0235, 0366, 0826

SCHAUB LORENZ

0388

SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398,

0695

SCOTCH 0205

SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263

SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181,

0183, 0198, 0205

SELECO 0190, 0286

SEMIVOX 0207

SEMP 0183

SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677

SHEN YING 0036, 0119

SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263

SIAREM 0543

SIEMENS 0064, 0222

SINUDYNE 0543

SKANTIC 0383

SKYGIANT 0207

SKYWORTH 0064

SOLAVOX 0190

SONITRON 0235

SONOKO 0036, 0064

SONOLOR 0190, 0235

SONTEC 0064

SONY 0027, 0677, 0861,

1127, 1532, 1678

SOUNDESIGN

0205, 0207

SOUNDWAVE

0064, 0445

SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119,

0183, 0205

SQUAREVIEW

0198

STANDARD 0036

STARLITE 0207

STERN 0190, 0286

SUPREME 0027

SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198

SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207

SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119,

0120, 0205, 0478

SYSLINE 0064

T + A 0474

TCM 0835

TMK 0205

TNCI 0044

TVS 0490

TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205

TAI YI 0036

TANDY 0120, 0190

TASHIKO 0119, 0677

TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078,

0081, 0087, 0181,

0183, 0543

TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291,

0439, 0445, 0482,

0695, 1064

TEC 0274

TECHNEMA 0347

TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677

TECHWOOD 0078

TECO 0036, 0078, 0119,

0120, 0205, 0291,

0680

TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119,

0177, 0207

TELEFUNKEN

0136, 0289, 0362,

0652, 0729

TELEMEISTER

0347

TELETECH 0036

TENSAI 0347

TERA 0057

THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587,

0652, 1474

THORN 0064, 0131, 0388,

0539

TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183,

0535, 0645, 0677,

0859, 1283, 1383,

1683, 1731

TRIUMPH 0543

TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119

UHER 0347

UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132,

0291, 0373, 0397,

0519

VECTOR RESEARCH

0057

VESTEL 0064

VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677,

0680

VIDEOSAT 0274

VIDIKRON 0081

VIDTECH 0205

VIEWSONIC 1782

VISION 0347

VOXSON 0190

WALTHAM 0383

WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205,

0893

WATSON 0064, 0347

WAYCON 0183

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0064, 0347, 0490,

0650

YAMAHA 0057, 0172, 0677,

0796, 0860,

2900 (projector),

2901 (projector),

2903,

2904 (projector)

YAPSHE 0277

YOKO 0064, 0291

ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205,

0490

VCR

ASA 0064, 0108

ADMIRAL 0075

ADVENTURA 0027

AIKO 0305

AIWA 0027, 0064, 0334,

0375, 0379

AKAI 0068, 0342

AKIBA 0099

ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342,

0379

AMERICA ACTION

0305

AMERICAN HIGH

0062

AMSTRAD 0027

ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267,

0305, 0507

ANAM NATIONAL

0253, 1589

ANITECH 0099

ASHA 0267

ASUKA 0064

AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305

BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131

BASIC LINE 0099, 0305

BEAUMARK 0267

BELL & HOWELL

0131

BLAUPUNKT 0253

BRANDT 0347

BRANDT ELECTRONIC

0068

BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506

BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379

CCE 0099, 0305

CGE 0027

CALIX 0064

CANON 0062

CARVER 0108

CIMLINE 0099

CINERAL 0305

CITIZEN 0064, 0305, 1305

COLT 0099

COMBITECH 0379

CRAIG 0064, 0074, 0099,

0267

CROWN 0099, 0305

CURTIS MATHES

0062, 0068, 0087,

1062

CYBERNEX 0267

CYRUS 0108

DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305,

0669, 1305

DANSAI 0099

DE GRAAF 0069

DECCA 0027, 0108

DENON 0069

DUAL 0068

DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131

DYNATECH 0027

ESC 0267, 0305

ELCATECH 0099

ELECTROHOME

0064

ELECTROPHONIC

0064

EMEREX 0059

EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064,

0070, 0072, 0211,

0267, 0305, 1305,

1506

FERGUSON 0068, 0347

FIDELITY 0027

FINLANDIA 0108, 0131

FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108,

0131

FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072,

0099

FISHER 0074, 0131

FUJI 0060, 0062

FUJITSU 0027, 0072

FUNAI 0027

GE 0062, 0087, 0267,

0834, 1062, 1087

GEC 0108

GARRARD 0027

GENERAL 0072

GO VIDEO 0459

GOLDHAND 0099

GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507,

1264

GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099,

0305

GRADIENTE 0027

GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267

GRANADA 0108, 0131

GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099

GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253,

0374

HCM 0099

HI-Q 0074

HANSEATIC 0064

HARLEY DAVIDSON

0027

HARMAN/KARDON

0108

HARWOOD 0099

HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379

HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068,

0069, 0267

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

RX-V661

Printed in Malaysia WJ70020

RX-V661

AV Receiver

Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

BRUKSANVISNING

GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

0069

HYPSON 0099

ITT 0068, 0131, 0267

ITV 0064, 0305

IMPERIAL 0027

INTERFUNK 0108

JVC 0068, 0072, 0094

JENSEN 0068

KEC 0064, 0305

KLH 0099

KAISUI 0099

KENWOOD 0068, 0094

KODAK 0062, 0064

KOLIN 0068, 0070

KORPEL 0099

LG 0064, 0069, 0072,

0507

LXI 0064

LENCO 0305

LEYCO 0099

LLOYD’S 0027

LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589

LOGIK 0099, 0267

LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131

M ELECTRONIC

0027

MEI 0062

MGA 0070, 0267

MGN TECHNOLOGY

0267

MTC 0027, 0267

MAGNASONIC

1305

MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066,

0108, 1808

MAGNIN 0267

MANESTH 0072, 0099

MARANTZ 0062, 0108

MARTA 0064

MATSUI 0375, 0379

MATSUSHITA

0062

MEDION 0375

MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064,

0066, 0074, 0075,

0131, 0267, 0334,

0375, 1264

MEMPHIS 0099

METZ 0064, 0374, 1589

MINOLTA 0069

MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,

0108, 0834

MOTOROLA 0062, 0075

MULTITECH 0027, 0099

MURPHY 0027

MYRYAD 0108

NAD 0131

NEC 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075, 0094, 0131

NATIONAL 0253

NECKERMANN 0108

NESCO 0099

NEWAVE 0064

NIKKO 0064

NOBLEX 0267

NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267

NORDMENDE 0068, 0347

OCEANIC 0027, 0068

OKANO 0342, 0375

OLYMPUS 0062, 0253

OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131,

0459

ORION 0211, 0375, 0379,

1506

OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099

OTTO VERSAND 0108

PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099

PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,

0643, 1062, 1589

PATHE MARCONI 0068

PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069,

0267, 1062, 1264

PENTAX 0069

PERDIO 0027

PHILCO 0062

PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645,

1108, 1208

PHONOLA 0108

PILOT 0064

PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108

POLK AUDIO 0108

PROFITRONIC 0267

PROLINE 0027

PROSCAN 0087, 1087

PROTEC 0099

PULSAR 0066

PYE 0108

QUASAR 0062, 1062

QUELLE 0108

RCA 0062, 0069, 0087,

0267, 0834, 1062,

1087

RADIOSHACK 0027

RADIOLA 0108

RADIX 0064

RANDEX 0064

REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064,

0074, 0075, 0131

REOC 0375

REPLAYTV 0641, 0643

REX 0068

ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,

0305

RUNCO 0066

SBR 0108

SEG 0267

SEI 0108

STS 0069

SABA 0068, 0347

SALORA 0070

SAMPO 0064, 0075

SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459

SANKY 0066, 0075

SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094,

1506

SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267

SAVILLE 0379

SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,

0131

SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108

SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211

SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064,

0069, 0074, 0131,

1264

SELECO 0068

SEMP 0072

SHARP 0075, 0834

SHINTOM 0099, 0131

SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131

SILVA 0064

SINGER 0072, 0099

SINUDYNE 0108

SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643

SONTEC 0064

SONY 0027, 0059, 0060,

0062, 0663, 1259

SUNKAI 0375

SUNSTAR 0027

SUNTRONIC 0027

SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108,

0070, 1808

SYMPHONIC 0027

TMK 0267

TANDY 0027, 0131

TASHIKO 0027, 0064

TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072,

0094, 0108

TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305,

0334, 0669

TECHNICS 0062, 0253

TECO 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075

TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064

TELEAVIA 0068

TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347

TENOSAL 00 99

TENSAI 0027

THOMAS 0027

THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094,

0347

THORN 0068, 0131

TIVO 0645, 0663

TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072,

0094, 0108, 0872

TOTEVISION 0064, 0267

UHER 0267

UNITECH 0267

UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,

0267

VECTOR 0072

VICTOR 0068, 0094

VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072

VIDEOMAGIC 0064

VIDEOSONIC 0267

VILLAIN 0027

WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069,

0074, 0075, 0087,

0099, 0108, 0267

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0099

XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099

YAMAHA 0068

YAMISHI 0099

YOKAN 0099

YOKO 0267

ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066,

1506

RX-V661_G-cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, December 19, 2006 10:57 PM

The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual.

Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi.

Die umkreisten Zahlen und Buchstaben entsprechen denen in der Bedienungsanleitung.

Inringade nummer och bokstäver motsvarar de som anges i bruksanvisningen.

De omcirkelde cijfers en letters corresponderen met die in de Gebruiksaanwijzing.

Цифры и буквы в кружках относятся к цифрам и буквам в Инструкции по эксплуатации.

■ Front panel/Face avant/Frontblende/Frontpanelen/Voorpaneel/Фронтальная панель

RX-V861/RX-V661

VOLUME

INPUT

PROGRAM

SCENE

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

ON/OFF

AUDIO SELECT

TONE CONTROL OPTIMIZER MIC

234

SPEAKERS

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM A/B/C/D/E

MEMORY

TUNING AUTO/MAN'L

ON/OFF

ZONE 2

CONTROL

ZONE

PRESET/TUNING

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

OFF

1234 567 89 0

ACDEHBIJF

00_sheet_RX-V861-661_G.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 17, 2007 10:08 AM

■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Fernbedienung/Fjärrkontrollen/

Afstandsbediening/Пульт ДУ

AUX/DOCK

–

––

ENTER

DISPLAY

AUDIO

TITLE

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

MUTE

ENT

1234

RETURN

OFF

CLEAR

LEARN

RENAME

MACRO

REC

FREQ/TEXT EON MODE- PTY SEEK- START

VOLUME

TV VOL

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

BAND

LEVEL

SLEEP

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

NIGHT

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

ENHANCER

MOVIE

SOURCE

AMP

SELECT

DTV/CBL

VCR

DVR

DVD

TUNER

MD/CD-R

PHONO

MULTI CH IN

POWER

SCENE

POWER

STANDBY

STEREO

SUR. DECODE

NIGHT

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

ENHANCER

MOVIE

WK14520

Printed in Malaysia

00_sheet_RX-V861-661_G.book Page i Wednesday, January 17, 2007 10:08 AM

Documenttranscriptie

RX-V661_G-cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, December 19, 2006 10:57 PM G MINOLTA MITSUBISHI 0069 0068, 0070, 0094, 0108, 0834 MOTOROLA 0062, 0075 MULTITECH 0027, 0099 MURPHY 0027 MYRYAD 0108 NAD 0131 NEC 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075, 0094, 0131 NATIONAL 0253 NECKERMANN 0108 NESCO 0099 NEWAVE 0064 NIKKO 0064 NOBLEX 0267 NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267 NORDMENDE 0068, 0347 OCEANIC 0027, 0068 OKANO 0342, 0375 OLYMPUS 0062, 0253 OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131, 0459 ORION 0211, 0375, 0379, 1506 OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099 OTTO VERSAND 0108 PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099 PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253, 0643, 1062, 1589 PATHE MARCONI 0068 PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069, 0267, 1062, 1264 PENTAX 0069 PERDIO 0027 PHILCO 0062 PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208 PHONOLA 0108 PILOT 0064 PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108 POLK AUDIO 0108 PROFITRONIC 0267 PROLINE 0027 PROSCAN 0087, 1087 PROTEC 0099 PULSAR 0066 PYE 0108 QUASAR 0062, 1062 QUELLE 0108 RCA 0062, 0069, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 RADIOSHACK 0027 RADIOLA 0108 RADIX 0064 RANDEX 0064 REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064, 0074, 0075, 0131 REOC 0375 REPLAYTV 0641, 0643 REX 0068 ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267, 0305 RUNCO 0066 SBR 0108 SEG 0267 SEI 0108 STS 0069 SABA 0068, 0347 SALORA 0070 SAMPO 0064, 0075 SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459 SANKY 0066, 0075 SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094, 1506 SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267 SAVILLE 0379 SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068, 0131 SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108 SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211 SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064, 0069, 0074, 0131, 1264 SELECO 0068 SEMP 0072 SHARP 0075, 0834 SHINTOM 0099, 0131 SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131 SILVA 0064 SINGER 0072, 0099 SINUDYNE 0108 SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0059, 0060, 0062, 0663, 1259 SUNKAI 0375 SUNSTAR 0027 SUNTRONIC 0027 © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108, 0070, 1808 SYMPHONIC 0027 TMK 0267 TANDY 0027, 0131 TASHIKO 0027, 0064 TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072, 0094, 0108 TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669 TECHNICS 0062, 0253 TECO 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075 TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064 TELEAVIA 0068 TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347 TENOSAL 0099 TENSAI 0027 THOMAS 0027 THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094, 0347 THORN 0068, 0131 TIVO 0645, 0663 TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072, 0094, 0108, 0872 TOTEVISION 0064, 0267 UHER 0267 UNITECH 0267 UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108, 0267 VECTOR 0072 VICTOR 0068, 0094 VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072 VIDEOMAGIC 0064 VIDEOSONIC 0267 VILLAIN 0027 WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0087, 0099, 0108, 0267 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0099 XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099 YAMAHA 0068 YAMISHI 0099 YOKAN 0099 YOKO 0267 ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066, 1506 All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WJ70020 RX-V661 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 0069 HYPSON 0099 ITT 0068, 0131, 0267 ITV 0064, 0305 IMPERIAL 0027 INTERFUNK 0108 JVC 0068, 0072, 0094 JENSEN 0068 KEC 0064, 0305 KLH 0099 KAISUI 0099 KENWOOD 0068, 0094 KODAK 0062, 0064 KOLIN 0068, 0070 KORPEL 0099 LG 0064, 0069, 0072, 0507 LXI 0064 LENCO 0305 LEYCO 0099 LLOYD’S 0027 LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589 LOGIK 0099, 0267 LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131 M ELECTRONIC 0027 MEI 0062 MGA 0070, 0267 MGN TECHNOLOGY 0267 MTC 0027, 0267 MAGNASONIC 1305 MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066, 0108, 1808 MAGNIN 0267 MANESTH 0072, 0099 MARANTZ 0062, 0108 MARTA 0064 MATSUI 0375, 0379 MATSUSHITA 0062 MEDION 0375 MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064, 0066, 0074, 0075, 0131, 0267, 0334, 0375, 1264 MEMPHIS 0099 METZ 0064, 0374, 1589 RX-V661 AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. Caution: Read this before operating your unit. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. 17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, and then disconnect the AC power plug from the AC wall outlet. En 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are: Asia model ............................ 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ........ 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz 20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or like. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet, it is not disconnected from the AC power source even if you turn off this unit by MASTER ON/OFF. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. ■ For U.K. customers If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. ■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. This symbol mark is according to the EU directive 2002/96/EC. This symbol mark means that electrical and electronic equipment, at their endof-life, should be disposed of separately from your household waste. Please act according to your local rules and do not dispose of your old products with your normal household waste. Contents Notice ....................................................................... 2 Features ................................................................... 3 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Getting started ........................................................ 4 Quick start guide .................................................... 5 Connections ........................................................... 11 Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room ................................................................... 28 Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 28 BASIC OPERATION Selecting the SCENE templates........................... 33 Playback ................................................................ 37 Sound field programs .......................................... 42 Using audio features ............................................. 48 Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 48 Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 48 Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 48 Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo ....49 Selecting the night listening mode........................... 49 Using SET MENU................................................... 69 1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 70 2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 76 3 OPTION MENU................................................... 79 Remote control features........................................82 Using the remote control for the SCENE feature .... 82 Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 83 Setting remote control codes ................................... 85 Programming codes from other remote controls ..... 87 Changing source names in the display window....... 88 Macro programming features .................................. 89 Clearing configurations ........................................... 92 Using multi-zone configuration............................95 Connecting Zone 2................................................... 95 Controlling Zone 2................................................... 96 Advanced setup......................................................98 Using the advanced setup ........................................ 98 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Troubleshooting...................................................102 Resetting the system............................................109 Glossary................................................................110 Sound field program information......................112 Parametric equalizer information .....................113 Specifications .......................................................114 Index .....................................................................116 APPENDIX (at the end of this manual) Front panel................................................................i Remote control ....................................................... ii List of remote control codes ................................. iii ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting sound field programs ............................... 42 Sound field program descriptions............................ 42 Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decoding mode)............................................................. 47 Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP).........67 ADVANCED OPERATION Basic procedure ....................................................... 37 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 38 Selecting the front speaker set ................................. 38 Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT).............................................. 39 Displaying the current status of this unit on a video monitor ................................................................ 39 Using your headphones............................................ 40 Muting the audio output........................................... 40 Playing video sources in the background of an audio source................................................................... 40 Displaying the input source information ................. 40 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 41 Changing sound field parameter settings................. 59 Selecting decoders ................................................... 64 BASIC OPERATION Selecting the desired SCENE template.................... 33 Creating your original SCENE templates................ 36 Advanced sound configurations...........................59 PREPARATION PREPARATION ADVANCED OPERATION INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 50 APPENDIX Automatic tuning ..................................................... 50 Manual tuning.......................................................... 50 Automatic preset tuning........................................... 51 Manual preset tuning ............................................... 51 Selecting preset stations........................................... 52 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 52 Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only) ......................................... 53 Using iPod™.......................................................... 56 Controlling iPod™................................................... 56 “1SPEAKERS” or “A DVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. Recording .............................................................. 58 1 En English Displaying the Radio Data System information ...... 53 Selecting the Radio Data System program type (PTY SEEK mode)........................................................ 54 Using the enhanced other networks (EON) data service ...................................................................... 55 NOTICE Notice About this manual • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • “1SPEAKERS” or “A DVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. • The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the corresponding reference page(s). Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DTS-ES | NEO:6 | 96/24. Product “DTS” and “DTS-ES | NEO:6” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. “96/24” is a trademark of DTS, Inc. iPodTM “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. 2 En Features Features HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) ◆ Minimum RMS output power (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω) Front: 90 W + 90 W Center: 90 W Surround: 90 W + 90 W Surround back: 90 W + 90 W ◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition video (includes 1080p video signal transmission) as well as multi-channel digital audio based on HDMI version 1.2a iPod controlling capability SCENE function ◆ 17 preset SCENE templates for various situations ◆ 4 original SCENE templates for customizing capability ◆ Controlling Yamaha SCENE control signal support component (some models only) working with the SCENE function Sound field programs ◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to that of a high-quality stereo ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix, Discrete, DTS Neo:6, DTS 96/24 decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA Sophisticated FM/AM tuner ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning Automatic preset tuning Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) Radio Data System capability (Europe model only) ◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini ◆ Playback information displaying capability ◆ Battery charging capability INTRODUCTION Built-in 7-channel power amplifier Other features ◆ YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system ◆ 5.1 or 7.1-channel additional input jacks for discrete multichannel input ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability includes (3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT) ◆ Digital video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S-video → component video) capability for monitor out ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes capability ◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility ◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and Zone 2 using ZONE CONTROL ◆ Bi-amplification connection capability ◆ Sleep timer Supplied accessories Check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control POWER TV POWER STANDBY Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) AM loop antenna POWER AV SCENE 1 2 PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R 3 CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD 4 SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE SOURCE LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE TV SET MENU MENU AUDIO BAND PURE DIRECT ENTER A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 2 1 STEREO 3 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 5 6 7 9 0 + 10 MOVIE 4 NIGHT 8 SLEEP Optimizer microphone Indoor FM antenna ENT REC FREQ/TEXT OFF ON EON MACRO MODE- PTY SEEK- START LEARN CLEAR RENAME English Note The form of the supplied accessories varies depending on the models. 3 En GETTING STARTED Getting started ■ Installing batteries in the remote control 2 1 3 1 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. Notes • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions: – the operation range of the remote control decreases. – the transmit indicator (X) does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use an old battery together with a new one. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. 4 En ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) Caution The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire hazard. Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or counterclockwise to the correct position using a straight slot screwdriver. Voltages are as follows: Asia model ...................................... 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ........................110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz VOLTAGE SELECTOR 230240V Voltage indication Quick start guide Quick start guide Video monitor Front right speaker Front left speaker INTRODUCTION The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater. Preparation: Check the items Subwoofer Surround right speaker In these steps, you need the following supplied accessories. ❏ AM loop antenna ❏ Indoor FM antenna Center speaker Surround back right speaker DVD player Surround back left speaker Surround left speaker Step 1: Set up your speakers ☞ P. 6 Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components ☞ P. 7 The following items are not included in the package of this unit. ❏ Speakers ❏ Front speakers .................................... 2 ❏ Center speaker ................................... 1 ❏ Surround speakers ............................. 4 Select magnetically shielded speakers. The minimum required speakers are two front speakers. The priority of the requirement of other speakers is as follows: 1. Two surround speakers 2. Center speaker 3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s) ❏ Active subwoofer .................................... 1 Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA input jack. ❏ Speaker cables ........................................ 7 ❏ Subwoofer cable ..................................... 1 Select a monaural RCA cable. ❏ DVD player ............................................... 1 Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital audio output jack and composite video output jack. ❏ Video monitor........................................... 1 Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector equipped with a composite video input jack. Step 3: Turn on the power and press SCENE 1 button ☞ P. 9 ❏ Video cable .............................................. 1 Select an RCA composite video cable. ❏ Digital coaxial audio cable ..................... 1 Enjoy DVD playback! English 5 En Quick start guide Step 1: Set up your speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this unit. AUDIO MULTI CH INPUT L L R R CENTER ZONE 2 OUT PRE OUT SINGLE Front speakers and center speaker VIDEO CENTER VIDEO GND PHONO CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT IN OUT VCR S VIDEO FRONT(6CH) SB(8CH) SURROUND SUB WOOFER FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUB WOOFER DVD DTV/CBL IN HDMI DOCK PR MD/CD-R MD/CD-R DVD DTV/CBL CD DVD 1 2 3 4 5 6 OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT ANTENNA DVD IN1 COAXIAL DTV/CBL IN2 DVR OUT IN OUT VCR MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR DTV/CBL B P B Y Loosen Insert Tighten DIGITAL INPUT SPEAKERS FRONT B/ZONE2/ R EXTRA SP L AM A PB DVD OUT FRONT A R L MONITOR OUT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SURROUND CENTER R L R C DVR AC OUTLETS L GND FM 75 UNBAL REMOTE IN TRIGGER OUT OUT +12V 15mA MAX. PRESENCE SINGLE 1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the room. 2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker. To the front right speaker To the front left speaker Center speaker Surround and surround back speakers Be sure to connect the “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. 3 Connect each speaker cable to the corresponding speaker terminal of this unit. 1 2 3 To the surround right speaker 4 To the surround back left speaker To the surround left speaker 1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables together to prevent short circuits. 3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other. 4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal part of this unit. 5 To the surround back right speaker Connect the subwoofer cable to the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack of this unit and the input jack of the subwoofer. Subwoofer AV receiver SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Input jack Subwoofer cable 6 En Quick start guide Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components MULTI CH INPUT L R CENTER ZONE 2 OUT PRE OUT SINGLE Connect the video cable to the composite video output jack of your DVD player and DVD VIDEO jack of this unit. VIDEO CENTER VIDEO GND PHONO CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT IN OUT VCR S VIDEO FRONT(6CH) SB(8CH) SURROUND DOCK SUB WOOFER FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUB WOOFER DVD DTV/CBL IN HDMI PR ANTENNA MD/CD-R MD/CD-R DVD 1 2 3 DTV/CBL 4 OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT CD DVD 5 6 DVD IN1 COAXIAL DTV/CBL IN2 DVR OUT IN VCR OUT MONITOR OUT DVD player COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR DTV/CBL B P B Y AV receiver OUT DIGITAL INPUT SPEAKERS FRONT B/ZONE2/ R EXTRA SP L AM A PB DVD FRONT A R SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SURROUND CENTER L MONITOR OUT R L R C DVR AC OUTLETS L GND FM 75 UNBAL REMOTE IN OUT TRIGGER OUT +12V 15mA MAX. PRESENCE INTRODUCTION AUDIO L R 2 SINGLE DVD VIDEO jack Composite video output jack Make sure that this unit and the DVD player are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. 3 1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD player and the DVD COAXIAL jack of this unit. Video cable Connect the video cable to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit and the video input jack of your video monitor. Video monitor AV receiver DVD player AV receiver Video input jack Digital coaxial audio output jack Video cable Digital coaxial audio cable VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack DVD DIGITAL INPUT coaxial jack English 7 En Quick start guide 4 Connect the supplied AM loop antenna and indoor FM antenna to this unit. See page 24 for the connection information. ■ For further connections • Using the other kind of speaker combinations ☞ P. 12 • Connecting a video monitor via various ways of the connection ☞ P. 18 AM loop antenna • Connecting a DVD player via various ways of the connection ☞ P. 19 • Connecting a DVD recorder or a digital video recorder ☞ P. 20 • Connecting a set-top box Indoor FM antenna Open the lever Insert ☞ P. 20 Close the lever • Connecting a CD player, an MD recorder or a turntable ☞ P. 21 • Connecting an external amplifier ☞ P. 22 • Connecting a DVD player via analog multichannel audio connection y The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND terminal ☞ P. 22 • Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock ☞ P. 23 Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna • Using the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ☞ P. 23 • Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel ☞ P. 23 • Connecting an outdoor FM/AM antenna ☞ P. 24 5 Connect the power plug of this unit and other components into the AC wall outlet. y This unit is equipped with AC OUTLET(S) for the power supply of the other components (except Korea model). See page 24 for details. Note The type of the power plug is different depending on the models. 8 En Quick start guide Step 3: Turn on the power and press SCENE 1 button 4 Start playback of the desired DVD on your player. If the connected DVD player is a Yamaha product and has capability of the SCENE control signals with the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit (see page 23), this unit can automatically activate the DVD player and start playback when you press the F SCENE1 button. Refer to the instruction manual of the DVD player for further information. Check the type of the connected speakers. If the speakers are 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 25). 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 99). 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press B MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position on the front panel. 5 INTRODUCTION y Rotate 0 VOLUME to adjust the volume. Note When you change the input source or sound field program, the SCENE mode is deactivated, and the indicator on the selected SCENE button turns off. ■ Using the other SCENE buttons 3 Press F SCENE1 button. “DVD Movie Viewing” appears in the front panel display, and this unit automatically optimize own status for the DVD playback. In the following cases, try pressing the corresponding SCENE button to enjoy the playback of the desired sources. Case A: “I want to listen to a music disc from the connected DVD player...” Press F SCENE2 (or A SCENE2) to select “Music Disc Listening”. Case B: “I want to watch a TV program...” Press F SCENE3 (or A SCENE3) to select “TV Viewing”. Case C: “I want to listen to a music program of the FM/AM radio station...” The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while this unit is in the SCENE mode. 9 En English y Press F SCENE4 (or A SCENE4) to select “Radio Listening”. Quick start guide Notes • To use the “TV Viewing” template (Case B), you must connect a satellite receiver, a cable TV receiver or an HDTV decoder to this unit in advance. See page 20 for details. • To use the “Radio Listening” template (Case C), you have to tune into the desired radio station. See pages 50 to 52 for the tuning information. • To achieve the best possible reception, orient the connected AM loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the indoor FM antenna. What do you want to do with this unit? ■ Customizing the SCENE templates • Using various SCENE templates ☞ P. 33 • Creating your original SCENE templates ☞ P. 36 y If you cannot find the desired situation, you can select and change the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE buttons. See page 33 for details. ■ Using various input sources • Basic controls of this unit ■ After using this unit... Press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this unit to the standby mode. ☞ P. 37 • Enjoying FM/AM radio programs ☞ P. 50 • Using your iPod with this unit ☞ P. 56 ■ Using various sound features • Using various sound field programs ☞ P. 42 • Using the pure direct mode for high fidelity sound ☞ P. 48 • Customizing the sound field programs ☞ P. 59 ■ Adjusting the parameters of this unit This unit is set to the standby mode and consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. To turn on this unit from the standby mode, press the desired F SCENE buttons (or A SCENE) or A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or I POWER on the remote control). See page 25 for details. • Automatically optimizing the speaker parameters for your listening room (AUTO SETUP) ☞ P. 28 • Manually adjusting various parameters of this unit manually ☞ P. 69 • Setting the remote control ☞ P. 82 • Adjusting the advanced parameters ☞ P. 98 ■ Additional features Automatically turning off this unit ☞ P. 41 10 En CONNECTIONS Connections Rear panel AUDIO jacks ZONE 2 OUT jacks Connect the analog audio cable plugs. Connect the amplifier in Zone 2. Video jacks Connect the video cable plugs. ☞ P. 95 ☞ P. 18-21 ☞ P. 18-20 MULTI CH INPUT jacks PRE OUT jacks Connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (sold separately). Connect the input source component equipped with the multi-channel output jacks. Connect external amplifiers and an active subwoofer. ☞ P. 23 ☞ P. 22 ☞ P. 22 AUDIO MULTI CH INPUT CENTER ZONE 2 OUT PRE OUT SINGLE VIDEO CENTER VIDEO L L PREPARATION DOCK terminal GND S VIDEO R R PHONO CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT IN OUT VCR FRONT(6CH) SB(8CH) SURROUND DOCK SUB WOOFER FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUB WOOFER DVD DTV/CBL IN HDMI PR MD/CD-R MD/CD-R DVD 1 2 3 DTV/CBL 4 OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT ANTENNA CD DVD 5 6 DVD IN1 COAXIAL DTV/CBL IN2 DVR OUT IN Y PR OUT VCR COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT DTV/CBL B PB Y OUT DIGITAL INPUT SPEAKERS FRONT A FRONT B/ZONE2/ R EXTRA SP L AM A PB DVD R R C MONITOR OUT SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SURROUND CENTER L L DVR AC OUTLETS L R GND FM 75 UNBAL REMOTE IN TRIGGER OUT +12V 15mA MAX. OUT PRESENCE SINGLE DIGITAL INPUT/ OUTPUT jacks Speaker terminals Connect the speakers. Connect the digital audio cable plugs. ☞ P. 13 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) ☞ P. 4 ☞ P. 19-21 AC OUTLET(S) HDMI connectors ANTENNA terminals Connect the FM and AM antenna. ANTENNA AM IN OUT ☞ P. 24 ☞ P. 16 ☞ P. 24 GND FM 75 UNBAL REMOTE Connect the HDMI components. TRIGGER +12V 15mA MAX. REMOTE IN/OUT jacks Connect the remote control input and output jacks of the Yamaha components. ☞ P. 23 English TRIGGER OUT Outputs the control signals to external components. 11 En Connections Placing speakers The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multichannel audio sources. PL PR C FR FL PR FR PL SW FL 30˚ C SL SR SR SBR SBL SL 60˚ SL 80˚ SBL SR SBR 1.8 m (6 ft) 30 cm (12 in) or more Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and SBR) The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions. Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR) The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the sound field programs (see page 42). To use the presence speakers, connect the speakers to EXTRA SP terminals and then set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE” (see pages 29 and 70). 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) PL 1.8 m (6 ft) PR FL FR 1.8 m (6 ft) C Subwoofer (SW) The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. 12 En Connections Connecting speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately. Note PREPARATION Caution • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 25). • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or the speakers. If the speaker wires are short-circuited, “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. • Use the magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. • If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 25). 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 99). A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. EXTRA SP terminals Connect the alternative front speaker system (FRONT B), presence speakers or Zone 2 speakers. To select the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals, set the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 70). Subwoofer y You can also select the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 29). PRE OUT SUB WOOFER SPEAKERS FRONT B/ZONE2/ R EXTRA SP L FRONT A R SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SURROUND CENTER L R L R PRESENCE L SINGLE Left Right Surround speakers Center speaker Left Right Surround back speakers When you use single surround back speaker, connect the speaker to the left SURROUND BACK terminal (SINGLE). 13 En English Left Right Front speakers (FRONT A) Connections ■ Connecting the speaker cable 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. ■ Connecting the banana plug (except Europe, Asia and Korea models) Tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. 10 mm (0.4 in) 2 Loosen the knob. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) ■ Using bi-amplification connections Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side of each terminal. Caution Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers. This unit allows you to make bi-amplification connections to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support biamplification. To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT and SURROUND BACK terminals as shown below. To activate the bi-amplification connections, set “BI-AMP” to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see page 101). Front speakers Right 4 Left Tighten the knob to secure the wire. FRONT A R SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP L R SINGLE L This unit Note When you make the conventional connection, make sure that the shorting bars are put into the terminals appropriately. Refer to the instruction manuals of the speakers for details. 14 En Connections Information on jacks and cable plugs Audio jacks and cable plugs AUDIO R (White) (Red) L R Left and right analog audio cable plugs DIGITAL DIGITAL COAXIAL OPTICAL (Orange) C Coaxial digital audio cable plug VIDEO S VIDEO (Yellow) O V Optical digital audio cable plug Composite video cable plug S S-video cable plug COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR (Green) (Blue) (Red) Y PB PR Component video cable plugs ■ Audio jacks ■ Video jacks This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components. This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your video monitor. AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite video cables. DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cables. DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables. Notes • You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling frequency. • Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. PREPARATION L Video jacks and cable plugs S VIDEO jacks For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate wires of S-video cables. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of component video cables. y This unit is equipped with the video conversion function. See pages 17 and 79 for details. English 15 En Connections Information on HDMI™ ■ HDMI compatibility with this unit Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible HDMI components 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, etc. DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. HDMI HDMI cable plug y This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following standards: • HDMI Version 1.2a (High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Version 1.2a) licensed by HDMI Licensing, LLC. • HDCP Revision 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC. Notes • When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. • You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (see page 41). 16 En ■ HDMI jack and cable plug • We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it. • Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. Notes • Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise. • Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit cannot be digitally output at the HDMI OUT jack. • If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to establish the connection to the component. Connections Audio and video signal flow ■ Audio signal flow Input ■ Video signal flow Output Input HDMI Output HDMI DIGITAL AUDIO (COAXIAL) AUDIO PREPARATION COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) S VIDEO VIDEO Digital output Through Analog output Video conversion ON (see page 79) Notes Notes • 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack can be output at the HDMI OUT jack only when “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER” (see page 75). • Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the AUDIO output and DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks. • When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the input signals is as follows: 1. COMPONENT VIDEO 2. S VIDEO 3. VIDEO • Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack cannot be output from analog video output jacks. • This unit does not accept analog component video signals with 1080p of resolution. • The OSD signal is not output at the VCR OUT, DVR OUT and HDMI MONITOR OUT jacks and is not recorded. • This unit does not deinterlace any analog video signals. English 17 En Connections Connecting a TV monitor or projector Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit. Notes • Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly. • When you connect your TV monitor or projector via HDMI connection, the OSD does not appear. In such cases, connect the TV monitor or projector via component, S-video or video connection. • Connect the input source components to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack to display the video images on the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. y You can choose to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. Use the “SUPPORT AUDIO” parameter in “SOUND MENU” to select the component to play back HDMI audio signals (see page 75). VIDEO VIDEO S VIDEO MONITOR OUT HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y OUT MONITOR OUT PR HDMI in PB Y Component video in S S-video in Video in TV (or projector) indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections 18 En V Connections Connecting other components Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Notes ■ Connecting a DVD player Optical out DVD player PREPARATION • When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 79), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 18). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other components to the VIDEO jacks. • When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 79), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. To record a source, make the same type of video connections between each component. • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 76). • If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. Video out Audio out S-video out Coaxial out HDMI out R O L Component video out C PR PB V S Y AUDIO VIDEO VIDEO S VIDEO DVD DVD HDMI PR DVD A PB DVD COMPONENT VIDEO Y DVD 3 6 OPTICAL COAXIAL DVD IN1 DIGITAL INPUT indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections English 19 En Connections ■ Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR DVD recorder, PVR or VCR Audio out S-video in Audio in Video in Video out R L R L S-video out V V S AUDIO S VIDEO VIDEO S VIDEO IN DVR OUT IN VCR IN OUT DVR OUT IN OUT VCR COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB C S S V Video in S-video in S-video out Video out Audio in L V Y DVR PR PB Y Component video out R Audio out L R DVD recorder, PVR ■ Connecting a set-top box Satellite receiver, cable TV receiver or HDTV decoder S-video out Video out Component video out R HDMI out L Audio out Optical out O V PR PB S Y AUDIO VIDEO VIDEO S VIDEO DTV/CBL DTV/CBL HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO PR DTV/CBL 4 OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT 20 En DTV/CBL IN2 DTV/CBL B P B Y Connections ■ Connecting audio components Notes • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each the DIGITAL INPUT jack or the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 76). • Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some turntables. • The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a lowoutput MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier. • When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jack and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack to an audio component, the priority is given to the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. CD player L R C Coaxial out R Audio out Audio out Ground L PREPARATION Turntable AUDIO L GND R PHONO IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) CD MD/CD-R MD/CD-R 1 2 5 DIGITAL INPUT R L R L Audio in O Audio out Optical in Optical out O CD COAXIAL DIGITAL OUTPUT CD recorder, MD recorder or tape deck English indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections 21 En Connections ■ Connecting an external amplifier This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However, if you want to add more power to the speaker output or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Notes • • • • • When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make connections to the SPEAKERS terminals. The signals output at the FRONT PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings (see page 48). Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer (see page 48). Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the settings for “SPEAKER SET” (see page 70) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70). 5 PRE OUT SINGLE CENTER L 3 SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks Surround back channel output jacks. When you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the SINGLE jack. Notes R FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUB WOOFER 1 2 3 4 1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Front channel output jacks. • When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, this unit outputs the front channel audio signals at the SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks. • The audio signals output at the SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks differ depending on the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” setting (see page 70). 2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Surround channel output jacks. 4 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier. 5 CENTER PRE OUT jack Center channel output jack. ■ Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or preamplifier. If you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 78), you can use the input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 78) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. Notes • When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38), this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. MULTI CH INPUT CENTER MULTI CH INPUT CENTER L SB(8CH) R L R L SURROUND R SUB WOOFER Center out R SB(8CH) Subwoofer out L FRONT(6CH) Surround out Front out Center out R Multi-format player/External decoder (5.1-channel output) Multi-format player/External decoder (7.1-channel output) *1 22 En R SUB WOOFER Subwoofer out Surround out Front out L SURROUND Surround back out FRONT(6CH) R L *1 R L L The analog audio input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in “MULTI CH SET” (see page 78). Connections ■ Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) where you can station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. Connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. • If the components have the capability of the SCENE control signals, this unit can automatically activate the corresponding components and start the playback when you use one of the SCENE buttons. Refer to the owner’s manuals for details about the capability of the SCENE control signals of the components. • Connect the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit and the remote control input jack of the components to control the components by using the SCENE feature. • If the component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack is not the Yamaha product, set “SCENE IR” in the advanced setup menu to “OFF” (see page 101). Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit. PREPARATION DOCK y Caution Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. Notes Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) • The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. • To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as the input source. ■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks When the components are the Yamaha products and have the capability of the transmission of the remote control signals, connect the REMOTE IN jack and REMOTE OUT jack to the remote control input and output jack with the monaural analog mini cable as follows. VOLUME SPEAKERS EDIT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L ZONE 2 ON/OFF ZONE CONTROL SCENE 1 2 3 4 INPUT PROGRAM MAIN ZONE MASTER PHONES STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL PURE DIRECT AUDIO SELECT VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC ON/OFF ON OFF EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL REMOTE IN Remote control out Infrared signal receiver or Yamaha component S VIDEO VIDEO L S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL R O OUT Remote control in S-Video output Video output Audio output Optical output Yamaha component Game console or video camera English 23 En Connections Connecting the FM and AM antennas Connecting the power cable Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. y See page 8 for connection information of the supplied indoor FM antenna and AM loop antenna. AC OUTLETS Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. AM loop antenna (supplied) ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) Indoor FM antenna (supplied) ANTENNA AM GND FM Outdoor AM antenna Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33 ft) vinyl-covered wire extended outdoors from a window. Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. 24 En To the AC wall outlet U.K. and Australia models..................................... 1 outlet Korea model............................................................... None Other models......................................................... 2 outlets Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected components. Connect the power cable of your other components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is supplied when the main zone or Zone 2 is turned on. However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when the main zone and Zone 2 are turned off or when B MASTER ON/ OFF on the front panel is pressed and released outward to the OFF position. For information on the maximum power or the total power consumption of the components that can be connected to these outlet(s), see “Specifications” on page 114. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the power supply is cut off for more than one week. Connections Setting the speaker impedance Caution If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers. 1 Press and hold C TONE CONTROL on the front panel and then press B MASTER ON/ OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. TONE CONTROL While holding down MASTER ON 3 OFF Rotate the D PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select “SP IMP.”. “SP IMP.” and the current speaker impedance setting (“8Ω MIN”) appear in the front panel display. ■ Turning on this unit Press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. When you turn on this unit by pressing B MASTER ON/ OFF, the main zone is turned on. y When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. ■ Turning off this unit Press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel again to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. Notes • A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as I POWER and H STANDBY on the remote control are operational only when B MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. • As usual, we recommend using the standby mode to turn off this unit. ■ Set the main zone to the standby mode 4 Press C TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select “6Ω MIN”. Press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or H STANDBY) to set the main zone to the standby mode. 5 Press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. Note The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit. PREPARATION 2 Make sure this unit is turned off. Refer to the right column for details. Turning this unit on and off ■ Turning on the main zone from the standby mode Press A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or I POWER) to turn on the main zone. y • You can also turn on the main zone by pressing F SCENE (or A SCENE) buttons. • When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. • These buttons are operational only when B MASTER ON/ OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. English 25 En Connections Front panel display 1 2 t 3 4 VCR 96 24 DVR 7 6 V-AUX DTV/CBL 8 DVD DOCK MATRIX DISCRETE DSD ENHANCER q EX 5 VIRTUAL SP SILENT CINEMA A B ZONE2 NIGHT HiFi DSP 9 MD/CD-R TUNER 0 CD PHONO YPAO AUTO TUNED STEREO MEMORY VOLUME PTY HOLD PS PTY RT CT EON SLEEP B C 96/24 LFE ft q PL mS dB PCM D E F G H I J K L dB MUTE q DIGITAL q PL x q PL A M L C R SL SB SR N O L ........ Europe model only 1B Input signal indicators Lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (Direct Stream Digital) or PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. 2C Decoder indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the decoders of this unit function. 9 Tuner indicators Lights up when this unit is in the FM or AM tuning mode (see pages 50 to 52). 0 MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 40). A VOLUME level indicator Indicates the current volume level. 3 ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is selected (see page 46). D Sound field indicators Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields. 4 HDMI indicator Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is input at HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jacks (see page 16). E VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 46). 5 SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 46). F Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 40). 6 DOCK indicator Lights up when you station your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 23) and V-AUX is selected as the input source. The DOCK indicator also lights up when this unit is charging the battery of the stationed iPod in the standby mode. 7 Input source indicators The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected input source. 8 YPAO indicator Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without any modifications (see page 28). 26 En G SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. H ZONE2 indicator Lights up when Zone 2 is turned on (see page 96). I NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see page 49). J DSP indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the DSP sound field programs are selected (see page 42). K Multi-information display Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. Connections L Radio Data System indicators (Europe model only) PS, PTY, RT and CT Light up according to the selected Radio Data System display mode. Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. EON Lights up when the EON data service is being received. Remote control sensor M SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 41). Approximately 6 m (20 ft) 30 PREPARATION PTY HOLD Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 30 N 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. O Input channel and speaker indicators LFE L C R SL SB SR LFE indicator Presence speaker indicators Input channel indicators Surround back speaker indicators Infrared window (Y) Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. Transmit indicator (X) Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared signals. Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. Display window (J) Shows the name of the selected input source that you can control. Presence and surround back speaker indicators Light up according to the number of presence and surround back speakers set for “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” (see page 70) and “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 71) in “SOUND MENU” when this unit is in the auto setup (see page 28) or the speaker level setting in “SOUND MENU” (see page 72) procedure. Operation mode selector (L) The function of some buttons depends on the operation mode selector position. y • You can make settings for surround back speakers automatically by running “AUTO SETUP” (see page 28) or manually by adjusting settings for “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 71) in “SOUND MENU”. • To use the presence speakers, set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE” (see page 29 or 70). AMP Operates the amplifier function of this unit. SOURCE Operates the component selected with an input selector button (see page 84). TV Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or PHONO (see page 83). Notes 27 En English • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places • To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 85. OPTIMIZING THE SPEAKER SETTING FOR YOUR LISTENING ROOM Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Using AUTO SETUP 2 Notes • Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL y • You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to L AMP. • This unit uses the speakers connected to the FRONT A speaker terminals as the front speakers for the adjustment. 1 The following menu screen appears on the video monitor. AUTO:MENU . EXTRASPASSIGN ZONE2 >FRONTB PRESENCENONE SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL START [ [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down []/[]:Select [ [ 3 [ Make sure of the following check points before starting the AUTO SETUP operations. ❏ Speakers are connected appropriately. ❏ Headphones are disconnected from this unit. ❏ This unit and the video monitor are turned on. ❏ The connected subwoofer is turned on and the volume level is set to about half way (or slightly less). ❏ The crossover frequency controls of the connected subwoofer is set to the maximum. ❏ The room is sufficiently quiet. Omni-directional microphone Place the optimizer microphone at your normal listening position on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone heading upward. Optimizer microphone y It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. You can use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer microphone to the tripod (etc.). 28 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room 4 Press D l / h to select the desired setting for “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” and then press D n. 6 Extra speaker assignment EXTRA SP ASSIGN Selects the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals. Choices: FRONT B, ZONE2, PRESENCE, NONE • When you use the Zone 2 speakers (see page 96) Select “ZONE2” to set the function of the speakers to the Zone 2 speakers. This unit drives the Zone 2 speakers by using the internal amplifier. • When you use the presence speakers (see page 12) Select “PRESENCE” to set the function of the speakers to the presence speakers. If you select “ON” in “BI-AMP” (see page 101), you cannot select “PRESENCE” or “ZONE2” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”. Press D n to select “START” and then press D ENTER to start the setup procedure. This unit starts the auto setup procedure. Loud test tones are output from each speaker during the auto setup procedure. Once all items are set, the “AUTO:RESULT” display appears in the OSD. Press D l / h to select “SETUP”. Notes Choices: AUTO, RELOAD, UNDO, DEFAULT • Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO SETUP” settings and override the previous settings. • Select “UNDO” to undo the last “AUTO SETUP” settings and restore the previous settings. • Select “DEFAULT” to reset the “AUTO SETUP” parameters to the initial factory settings. • During the auto setup procedure, do not perform any operation on this unit. • We recommend getting out of the room while this unit is in the auto setup procedure. It takes approximately 3 minutes for this unit to complete the auto setup procedure. Note 5 7 PREPARATION Parametric equalizer type EQ Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the specified frequency bands. This unit automatically selects the crucial frequency bands for the listening room and adjusts the level of the selected frequency bands to create a cohesive sound field in the room. You can select the type of the parametric equalizer adjustment from the following choices. Choices: NATURAL, FLAT, FRONT • Select “NATURAL” to average out the frequency response of all speakers with higher frequencies being less emphasized. Recommended if the FLAT setting sounds a little harsh. • Select “FLAT” to average the frequency response of all speakers. Recommended if all of your speakers are of similar quality. • Select “FRONT” to adjust the frequency response of each speaker in accordance with the sound of your front speakers. Recommended if your front speakers are of much higher quality than your other speakers. • When you use the alternative front speaker system (see page 38) Select “FRONT B”. • When you do not use the EXTRA SP terminals Select “NONE” to deactivate the EXTRA SP terminals. Press D l / h to select the desired setting of “EQ” and then press D n. Notes • “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is available only when you have previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results. • “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is not available when you change the setting of “BI-AMP” in the advanced setup (see page 101) or “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SOUND MENU” (see page 70). English 29 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room This unit performs the following checks: The results displayed under “RESULT” are as follows. Speaker wiring WIRING Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. Number of speakers SP Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in the following order: Front/Back/Subwoofer Speaker size SIZE Checks the frequency response of each speaker and sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each channel. Speaker distance DIST Displays the speaker distance from the listening position in the following order: Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance Speaker distance DISTANCE Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. Speaker level LVL Displays the speaker output level in the following order: Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level Equalizing EQUALIZING Checks and adjusts the tonal characteristics of all the speakers by the setting of “EQ”. Notes • If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing procedure, restart from step 4. • If you selected “RELOAD” in step 4, no test tones are output. • If an error occurs during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure, the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on page 32. • When this unit detects potential problems during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” and the number of warning messages appears in the above of “RESULT” (see page 32). • Depending on the listening environment, “SWFR PHASE:REV” appears during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure and “SUBWOOFER PHASE” in “SOUND MENU” (see page 72) is automatically set to “REVERSE”. Speaker level LEVEL Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker. The display changes as follows. AUTO:MENU EXTRASPASSIGN ZONE2 >FRONTB PRESENCENONE SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO EQ;;;;;;;NATURAL . START [ [ [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down []/[]:Select [ [ AUTO:CHECK [ INITIALIZING . WIRING SIZE/DISTANCE EQUALIZING LEVEL CHECKCH=CENTER |||||;;;;;;;; []:Exit 8 Press D ENTER to display the setup results in detail. AUTO:RESULT AUTO:RESULT . RESULT SP : 3/4/0.1 DIST: 4.50/5.30m LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB > SET CANCEL . RESULT SP : 3/4/0.1 DIST: 4.50/5.30m LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB > SET CANCEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter RESULT:WIRING FRONT L;;;;;;;OK [[]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return 30 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room 9 Press D l / h repeatedly to toggle between the setup result displays. 10 Press D ENTER to return to the top “AUTO:RESULT” display. Results of the speaker connection and wiring AUTO:RESULT . RESULT SP : 3/4/0.1 DIST: 4.50/5.30m LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB > SET CANCEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Results of the speaker distance from the listening position Make sure the pointer is pointing at “SET” and “CANCEL” and then press D l / h to select “SET” or “CANCEL”. Results of the setting of each speaker size AUTO:RESULT PREPARATION 11 RESULT SP : 3/4/0.1 DIST: 4.50/5.30m LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB . > SET CANCEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Results of the parametric equalizer of each speaker Choices: SET, CANCEL • Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP” results. • Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP” results. Results of the speaker output level 12 y Press D ENTER to confirm your selection. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 67). SET MENU . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP .A;SIGNAL INFO Notes p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p • The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer. • In the “EQ” results, different values may be set for the same frequency to provide finer adjustments. 13 Press N SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. 14 Disconnect the optimizer microphone from this unit. The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit. y 31 En English If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to recalibrate your system. Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room ■ If an error screen appears 2 Press D k / n / l / h to select “RETRY” or “EXIT” and then press D ENTER. The following display is an example where “E-9:USER CANCEL” appears in the OSD. Press D l / h repeatedly to toggle between the warning displays. WARNING:W-1 <OUT OF PHASE> Reverse Channel FL -CENTER PL PR SL SR SBL SBR [[]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return AUTO:ERROR . E-9:USER CANCEL Don't operate any function. >RETRY EXIT y [[]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Enter Choices: RETRY, EXIT • Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. ■ If “WARNING” appears When this unit detects potential problems during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” appears in the “AUTO:RESULT” display. Check the warning messages to correct your speaker settings. Note Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. 1 Make sure the pointer is pointing at “WARNING” and then press D ENTER to display the detailed information about the warning. The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates the number of warning messages. AUTO:RESULT . WARNING(3) RESULT SP : 3/4/0.1 DIST: 4.50/5.30m LVL : -9.0/+6.5dB >SET CANCEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 32 En • For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO SETUP” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 107. • When the corresponding warning message is not applicable to a speaker, “– –” is displayed instead. 3 Press D ENTER to return to the top “AUTO:RESULT” display. SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES Selecting the SCENE templates This unit is equipped with 17 preset SCENE templates for various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to each SCENE button: 2 SCENE 1: DVD Movie Viewing SCENE 2: Music Disc Listening SCENE 3: TV Viewing SCENE 4: Radio Listening Rotate the I INPUT selector (or set the operation mode selector to L AMP and then press D l / h) to select the desired template. DVD Viewing If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE buttons on the front panel and the remote control. Select the desired SCENE template 3 Press the F SCENE (or A SCENE) button again to confirm the selection. The selected SCENE template is assigned to the SCENE button. 1 SCENE template library (Image) Assign the SCENE template to the SCENE button Selecting the desired SCENE template 1 Front panel or BASIC OPERATION 1 1 Remote control Notes • If you do not carry out any operation within 30 seconds from the last operation in these steps, this procedure is automatically canceled. • Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the corresponding SCENE buttons, you need to set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 82 for details. Press and hold the F SCENE (or A SCENE) button for 3 seconds. The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the front panel starts to flash, and the name of the currently assigned SCENE template appears in the front panel display. 3 seconds 3 seconds or 1 1 Remote control Front panel 1 Flashes English DVD MovieView 33 En Selecting the SCENE templates ■ Which SCENE template would you like to select? Which source do you like to play back? Video sources (DVD video, Recorded video) Which component do you like for playback? DVD SCENE templates Default SCENE buttons DVD Viewing DVD Movie Viewing 1 DVD Live Viewing Music discs (CD, SACD or DVD-Audio) DVR DVR Viewing DVD Disc Hifi Listening Music Disc Listening 2 Disc Listening CD CD Hifi Listening CD Listening CD Music Listening Radio programs iPod * TV programs TUNER (FM/AM) Radio Listening DOCK iPod Listening To listening to the iPod, you need to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (sold separately) to this unit (see page 56). DTV/CBL TV Viewing TV Sports Viewing Video games V-AUX Action Game Playing RPG Playing Vinyl records PHONO LP Record Listening y You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 36 for details. 34 En 4 3 Selecting the SCENE templates ■ Preset SCENE templates descriptions The illustrations of the SCENE button in the following table indicate the assigned SCENE buttons as the default setting. SCENE template Input source Playback mode DVD Viewing DVD*1 Features STRAIGHT DVD Movie Viewing DVD*1 MOVIE Sci-Fi Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your DVD player. DVD Live Viewing DVD*1 ENTERTAINMENT Music Video Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the music live video on your DVD player. DVR Viewing DVR MOVIE Drama Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your digital video recorder. Disc Hifi Listening DVD*1 PURE DIRECT Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity sound of the music discs on your DVD player. Music Disc Listening DVD*1 STEREO 2ch STEREO Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on your DVD player. Disc Listening DVD*1 STEREO 7ch STEREO Select this SCENE template when you play back music sources on your DVD player as the background music. CD Hifi Listening CD*1 PURE DIRECT CD Listening CD*1 STEREO 2ch STEREO Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on your CD player. CD Music Listening CD*1 STEREO 7ch STEREO Select this SCENE template when you play back music source on your CD player as the background music. Radio Listening TUNER MUSIC ENHANCER 7ch Enhancer Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM radio programs. iPod Listening DOCK (V-AUX) MUSIC ENHANCER 7ch Enhancer Select this SCENE template when you play back music on your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock. TV Viewing DTV/CBL STRAIGHT Select this SCENE template when you enjoy general programs on your TV. TV Sports Viewing DTV/CBL ENTERTAINMENT Sports Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports programs on your TV. Action Game Playing V-AUX*2 ENTERTAINMENT Action Game Select this SCENE template when you play action games such as car racing and FPS games. RPG Playing V-AUX*2 ENTERTAINMENT Roleplaying Game Select this SCENE template when you play role-playing games. LP Record Listening PHONO PURE DIRECT Select this SCENE template when you play back general contents on the DVD player. 1 2 BASIC OPERATION 4 Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity sound of the music discs on your CD player. 3 *1 *2 You can select “V-AUX” as the input source even if your iPod is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit. English When the connected DVD player or CD player has the capability of the SCENE control signals and is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, this unit operates the DVD player or CD player worked with the SCENE features. Select this SCENE template when you play back vinyl records on your turntable. 35 En Selecting the SCENE templates Creating your original SCENE templates 3 You can create your original SCENE templates for each SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 17 SCENE templates to create the original SCENE templates. Select the desired SCENE template Create an original SCENE template • INPUT: • MODE: The input source component. The active sound field programs, STRAIGHT or Pure Direct mode. • NIGHT: The night listening mode (see page 49). − SYSTEM: Keeps the current night listening mode. − CINEMA: Sets the night listening mode to the CINEMA mode. − MUSIC: Sets the night listening mode to the MUSIC mode. SCENE template library (Image) 1 Assign the SCENE template to the SCENE button 1 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Set the operation mode selector to L AMP and then press and hold the desired A SCENE button for 3 seconds. The SCENE template customizing screen appears on the video monitor. [ SCENE1 .pDVDViewing[ INPUT: DVD MODE:STRAIGHT NIGHT:SYSTEM [ENTER]:Rename [SCENE1]:SET [RETURN]:STATUS Note When the SCENE template you want to customize is not assigned to any of the A SCENE buttons, press D l / h repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template on the menu screen. 36 En Press D k / n to select the desired parameter of the SCENE template and then D l / h to select the desired value of the selected parameter. You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE template: 4 Press the A SCENE button again to confirm the edit. y An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE template. Notes • Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the corresponding A SCENE buttons, you need to set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 82 for details. • You can create a customized SCENE template for each SCENE button, and if you create another customized SCENE template, this unit overwrites the old customized SCENE template with the new one. • The newly created template is only available for the assigned SCENE button. ■ Rename the SCENE templates Select the name of the SCENE template at step 3 of “Creating your original SCENE templates” and then press D ENTER. • Press D k / n to select the desired character. • Press D l / h to place an “_” (underscore) under the space or the desired character. • Press E RETURN to cancel the new name. • Press D ENTER to confirm the new name. PLAYBACK Playback Caution Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. 3 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. • Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. • See page 50 for details about tuning instructions. 4 Rotate 0 VOLUME (or press K VOLUME +/–) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. y To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio connection, set “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” to “DTS” before the playback (see page 78). y • See page 48 to adjust the level of each speaker. • This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level. • You can set the initial volume level and maximum volume level (see page 75). y Basic procedure 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 5 Rotate the D PROGRAM selector (or press one of the sound field program selector buttons (U) repeatedly) to select the desired sound field program. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display. See page 42 for details about sound field programs. BASIC OPERATION Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to L AMP. y See page 40 to display the input source information. 2 Rotate the I INPUT selector (or press one of the input selector buttons (B)) to select the desired input source. Sci-Fi Currently selected sound field program The name of the currently selected input source appears in the front panel display for a few seconds. Note Available input sources VCR DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO INPUT:DVD Currently selected input source y The corresponding input selector button on the remote control for the currently selected input source lights up for approximately 5 seconds after you press any buttons on the remote control, showing which source component is currently being operated. Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). y • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • To display information about the currently selected sound field program in the OSD, see page 59 for details. English 37 En Playback Selecting the front speaker set ■ A quick guide to contents When you want to... See page Enjoy pure hi-fi stereo sound 48 Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 48 Adjust the parameters of sound field programs 59 Enjoy sources with a wide dynamic range at night 49 Use headphones 40 Enjoy multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo 49 Select a decoder to play back sources with 64 Automatically set this unit to the standby mode 41 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 22) as the input source. Rotate the I INPUT selector to select MULTI CH (or B MULTI CH IN). “MULTI CH” appears in the front panel display. y Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the parameters for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 78). Note Sound field programs and the night listening mode cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source. Use this feature to turn the front speaker system (FRONT A and/or FRONT B) on or off. Press 1 SPEAKERS on the front panel repeatedly to turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or EXTRA SP speaker terminals. The active front speaker set changes as follows: FRONT A OFF FRONT B FRONT A and FRONT B Notes • FRONT A and B or FRONT B setting is not available when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to “PRESENCE”, “ZONE 2” or “NONE” (see page 70). • Turn off the volume level of this unit when you switch the front speaker setting. ■ Using the Zone B feature When you set “FRONT B” to “ZONE B” (see page 70), you can use the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP speaker terminals in another room (Zone B). Press 1 SPEAKERS on the front panel repeatedly to turn on or off the Zone B speakers. When you activate the Zone B speakers, all the speakers in the main room are muted. Notes • You cannot activate both the main room and Zone B speakers simultaneously. • If you select CINEMA DSP sound field program and activate the Zone B speakers, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically (see page 46). 38 En Playback Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT) Displaying the current status of this unit on a video monitor This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this feature (audio input jack select) to switch between input jacks when more than one input jack is assigned to as the same input source. You can display the operating information of this unit on a video monitor. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Set the operation mode selector to L AMP and then press R DISPLAY on the remote control. The current status screen appears in the OSD. y • We recommend setting the audio input jack select to “AUTO” in most cases. • You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 80). Press H AUDIO SELECT (or O AUDIO) repeatedly to select the desired audio input jack select setting. STATUSVOL:-40.0dB Available input sources VCR DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO A.SEL:AUTO Currently selected audio input jack select setting AUTO Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) HDMI (2) Digital signals (3) Analog signals HDMI Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI signals are not input, no sound is output. COAX/OPT Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack. (2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack. When no signals are input, no sound is output. ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. y You can select the amount of time that the current status is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79). BASIC OPERATION MOVIE Sci-Fi INPUT:DVD A.SEL:HDMI NIGHT:OFF Note The OSD signal is not output at the VIDEO output jacks and will not be recorded. Note This feature is not available when no digital input jacks (OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. Use “I/O ASSIGNMENT” in “INPUT MENU” to reassign the respective input jack (see page 76). English 39 En Playback Using your headphones Playing video sources in the background of an audio source Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on the front panel. VOLUME SPEAKERS EDIT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L ZONE 2 ON/OFF Press the input selector buttons (B) on the remote control to select a video source and then an audio source. ZONE CONTROL SCENE 1 2 3 4 INPUT PROGRAM MAIN ZONE MASTER PHONES TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT AUDIO SELECT You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC ON/OFF ON OFF SILENT CINEMA EFFECT S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD Audio sources Video sources y y When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode activates automatically (see page 46). Notes • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker terminals. • All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. Muting the audio output Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH SET” menu to the desired setting to select the default background video input source of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 78). Displaying the input source information You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal. 1 Press M MUTE on the remote control to mute the audio output. Press M MUTE again to resume the audio output. SET MENU y [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p 40 En . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP .A;SIGNAL INFO p • You can also rotate 0 VOLUME on the front panel or press K VOLUME +/– to resume the audio output. • You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTE TYPE” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 74). • The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel display when the audio output is resumed. Set the operation mode selector to L AMP and then press N SET MENU on the remote control. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. 2 Press D n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO” and then press D ENTER. The audio information about the input source appears in the OSD. 3 Press D l / h to toggle between the audio and video information displays. Playback 4 Press N SET MENU on the remote control again to exit from “SET MENU”. ■ Audio information Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a digital signal, it automatically switches to analog input. SAMPLING The number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make a discrete signal. CHANNEL The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. BITRATE The number of bits passing a given point per second. FLAG Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (see page 24). Set the operator mode to L AMP and then press S SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press S SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. SLEEP 120min Note SLEEP OFF SLEEP 30min SLEEP 90min SLEEP 60min The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. “---” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding information. BASIC OPERATION FORMAT Using the sleep timer Flashes ■ Video information SLEEP HDMI RES. Resolution of the HDMI signals input or output at the HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit. HDMI ERROR Error message for HDMI sources or connected HDMI devices. See page 107 for details. SLEEP120min Lights up SLEEP STRAIGHT ■ Canceling the sleep timer Press S SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. Disappears SLEEPOFF The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF” disappears from the front panel display after a few seconds. 41 En English y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing H STANDBY (or A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF) to set the main zone to the standby mode. SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field programs This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. y • The Yamaha HiFi DSP sound field programs recreate real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in actual concert halls, music venues, movie theaters, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • You can change sound field parameters. See page 59 for details. Selecting sound field programs Rotate the D PROGRAM selector (or set the operation mode selector to L AMP and then press one of the sound field selector buttons (U) repeatedly). The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. Notes • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). • When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field program, this unit applies the selected program without activating the DTS 96/24 decoder. • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to 48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied. • When the sampling frequency of the input sources are higher than 96 kHz, this unit does not apply any sound field programs. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. Sound field program descriptions y Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc. Remote control button Name of the program Category of the program Created sound fields CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP MOVIE MOVIE 4 Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background music. DSP LEVEL P.INIT. DLY P.ROOM SIZE S.INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY Available sound field parameters (see page 61) Sound field indicators Presence sound field Listening position Surround left sound field Surround back sound field 42 En Surround right sound field SB ROOM SIZE DIALG. LIFT Program description Sound field programs ■ For audio music sources y For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (see page 48). Notes • The available sound field parameters differ depending on the settings of the speakers. • “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 70). CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN 1 3 CLASSICAL Hall in Munich HiFi DSP This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener's virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN 1 3 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS CLASSICAL DIALG.LIFT Hall in Vienna HiFi DSP DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY CLASSICAL 1 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS CLASSICAL DIALG.LIFT Chamber HiFi DSP BASIC OPERATION This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 2 LIVENESS REV.TIME LIVE/CLUB REV.DELAY REV. LEVEL DIALG.LIFT Cellar Club HiFi DSP This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 2 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS LIVE/CLUB DIALG.LIFT The Roxy Theatre HiFi DSP This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener's virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY LIVE/CLUB 2 ROOM SIZE LIVENESS LIVE/CLUB REV.TIME REV.DELAY The Bottom Line REV. LEVEL DIALG.LIFT HiFi DSP This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY ROOM SIZE LIVENESS DIALG.LIFT English 43 En Sound field programs ■ For various sources Notes • The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. • “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 70). ENTERTAIN 3 ENTERTAINMENT Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY ENTERTAIN 3 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY ENTERTAINMENT S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Action Game This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY ENTERTAIN 3 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY ENTERTAINMENT S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Roleplaying Game This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT ■ For visual sources of music Notes • The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. • “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 70). LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 2 3 ENTERTAINMENT Music Video HiFi DSP This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY 44 En P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Sound field programs ■ For movie sources y You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 64 for details. Notes • The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. • “DIALG.LIFT” is available only when “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 70). MOVIE 4 MOVIE Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear. DSP LEVEL S. INIT. DLY MOVIE 4 S. ROOM SIZE S.LIVENESS MOVIE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE SB LIVENESS DIALG.LIFT Spectacle DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY MOVIE 4 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY MOVIE Sci-Fi SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT BASIC OPERATION This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound. This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background music. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY MOVIE 4 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY MOVIE S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY MOVIE 4 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY MOVIE S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing. DSP LEVEL P. INIT. DLY MOVIE 4 P. ROOM SIZE S. INIT. DLY MOVIE S. ROOM SIZE SB INI. DLY SB ROOM SIZE DIALG.LIFT Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth. ROOM SIZE LIVENESS REV.TIME REV.DELAY English DSP LEVEL INIT. DLY REV. LEVEL DIALG.LIFT 45 En Sound field programs ■ Stereo playback Note The available parameters differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. STEREO 5 STEREO 2ch STEREO Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. See page 49 for details. DIRECT STEREO 5 STEREO 7ch STEREO HiFi DSP Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. CT LEVEL SL LEVEL SR LEVEL SB LEVEL PL LEVEL PR LEVEL ■ The Compressed Music Enhancer ENHANCER 6 MUSIC ENHANCER 2ch Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of lowfrequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance of the overall sound system. Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 2-channel stereo. Effect level ENHANCER 6 MUSIC ENHANCER 7ch Enhancer Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo. Effect level ■ Using sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) ■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. When you set “SUR. L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 71), Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 42). SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 42). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display. Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71) in the following cases: – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. – when this unit is in the “7ch Stereo” mode. 46 En Notes • SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). • SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see page 48) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 49) is selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 47). Sound field programs Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decoding mode) When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. Press E STRAIGHT (or Q STRAIGHT) to select “STRAIGHT”. STRAIGHT ■ Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode BASIC OPERATION Press E STRAIGHT (or Q STRAIGHT) so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. The sound effect is turned back on. English 47 En USING AUDIO FEATURES Using audio features y Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector on the remote control to L AMP. Enjoying pure hi-fi sound Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity sound of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. Press G PURE DIRECT (or P PURE DIRECT) to turn the Pure Direct mode on or off. The G PURE DIRECT button lights up while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode. The front panel display automatically dims. Adjusting the speaker level You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Note This operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 28) and “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see page 72). 1 Press C LEVEL on the remote control repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. Display Notes • The following operations are not possible when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode: – switching the sound field program – displaying the OSD – adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters (except for level settings) – operating video functions (video conversion, etc.) • The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this unit is turned off. y The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation is performed. Adjusting the tonal quality Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front left and right speaker channels. 2 Rotate the D PROGRAM selector to adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS). Notes • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT is selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. 48 En Front left speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SWFR Subwoofer SUR. L Surround left speaker SUR. R Surround right speaker SUR.B.L Surround back left speaker SUR.B.R Surround back right speaker PRNS L Presence left speaker PRNS R Presence right speaker • Once you press C LEVEL on the remote control, you can also select the speaker by pressing D k / n. • Instead of “SUR.B.L” and “SUR.B.R”, “SUR.B” is displayed if “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 71). • The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently. Press C TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS). FRONT L y y 1 Adjusted speaker 2 Press D l / h to adjust the speaker output level. • Press D h to increase the value. • Press D l to decrease the value. Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Using audio features Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo. Press U STEREO on the remote control repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”. y Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases: –when the Pure Direct mode (see page 48) is selected. –when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). –when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. • You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 72). • You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the D PROGRAM selector on the front panel. • See page 64 for details about the parameters of the “2ch Stereo” mode. Selecting the night listening mode BASIC OPERATION The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. 1 Press W NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC”. Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF • Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature. y When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display. 2 Press D l / h to adjust the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front panel display. Effect.Lvl:MID Choices: MIN, MID, MAX • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. y “NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are stored independently. English 49 En FM/AM TUNING FM/AM tuning There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. Note Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception. Automatic tuning Manual tuning Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. 1 Rotate the I INPUT selector on the front panel to select “TUNER” as the input source. If the signal received from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. Note Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. 2 Press 3 FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. 1 Rotate the I INPUT selector on the front panel to select “TUNER” as the input source. 3 Press 7 TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. 2 Press 3 FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. 3 Press 7 TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. Lights up AUTO AFM89.10MHz AFM89.10MHz No colon (:) If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press 2 PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. • Press 5 h to tune into a higher frequency. • Press 5 l to tune into a lower frequency. 50 En No colon (:) If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press 2 PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into the desired station manually. y Hold down the button to continue searching. FM/AM tuning Notes Automatic preset tuning • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for all the available stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” below. • Only Radio Data System broadcasting station are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning (Europe model only). You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. Rotate the I INPUT selector on the front panel to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press 3 FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception band. “FM” appears in the front panel display. 3 Press and hold 6 MEMORY for more than 3 seconds. The preset station number as well as the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies. Flashes AUTO Manual preset tuning You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) manually. 1 Tune into a station. See page 50 for tuning instructions. 2 Press 6 MEMORY on the front panel. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 10 seconds. MEMORY BASIC OPERATION 1 A1:FM89.10MHz MEMORY Flashes When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. y • You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores FM stations. Press 4 A/B/C/D/E and then 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h repeatedly after you perform step 3 to select the preset station number under which the first station will be stored. • You can begin tuning toward lower frequencies to store FM stations automatically. Press 2 PRESET/TUNING so that the colon (:) disappears from the front panel display and then press 5 PRESET/TUNING l after pressing and holding 6 MEMORY for more than 3 seconds. Flashes 3 Press 4 A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset station group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. Flashes MEMORY A:FM89.10MHz Preset station group Colon (:) English 51 En FM/AM tuning 4 Press 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. • Press 5 h to select a higher preset station number. • Press 5 l to select a lower preset station number. 2 Flashes Press 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h on the front panel (or D PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band and frequency. MEMORY A1:FM89.10MHz A1:FM89.10MHz Preset station number 5 Press 6 MEMORY while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset station group and number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator disappears from the front panel display. A1:FM89.10MHz Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”. 1 Select preset station “E1” using 4 A/B/C/D/E and 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h on the front panel. See “Selecting preset stations” on the left column. 2 Press and hold 2 EDIT for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. The displayed station has been stored as A1. Flashes Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. Selecting preset stations MEMORY E1:FM89.10MHz Flashes 3 You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting the preset station group and number under which it was stored. Select preset station “A5” using 4 A/B/C/D/ E and 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. See “Selecting preset stations” on the left column. y Flashes When performing this operation with the remote control, set the operation mode selector to L SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 Press 4 A/B/C/D/E (or press D A/B/C/D/E l / h) to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. 52 En MEMORY A5:FM89.10MHz Flashes 4 Press 2 EDIT again. “EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and the assignments of the two preset stations are exchanged. RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY) Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only) Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. This unit can receive various Radio Data System data such as PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), CT (clock time), and EON (enhanced other networks) when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations. Displaying the Radio Data System information Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. • We recommend using the automatic preset tuning to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (see page 51). • You can also use PTY SEEK mode to tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station from the preset ones. 2 Press G FREQ/TEXT on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data System display mode. Use this feature to display the 4 types of the Radio Data System information: PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text) and CT (clock time). The corresponding indicators light up in the front panel display. Notes • You can select one of the Radio Data System display modes only when the corresponding Radio Data System indicator lights up in the front panel display. It may take a while for this unit to receive all of the Radio Data System data from the station. • You can select only the available Radio Data System display modes being offered by the station. • If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and may not be available even when the other Radio Data System display modes are available. • In case of poor reception conditions, press 7 TUNING AUTO/ MAN’L on the front panel so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. • If the signal strength is weakened by external interference while this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front panel display. • When the “RT” mode is selected, this unit can display the program information by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters are displayed with the “_” (underscore). • If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT WAIT” appears in the front panel display. PS PTY RT CT BASIC OPERATION 1 Frequency display • Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data System program currently being received. • Select “PTY” to display the type of the Radio Data System program currently being received. • Select “RT” to display the information on the Radio Data System program currently being received. • Select “CT” to display the current time. English 53 En Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only) Selecting the Radio Data System program type (PTY SEEK mode) Use this feature to select the desired radio program by program type from the all preset Radio Data System broadcasting stations. 4 Press D PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control to select the desired program type. The name of the selected program type appears in the front panel display. y Use the automatic preset tuning feature to preset Radio Data System broadcasting stations (see page 51). POP M 1 Lights up 2 3 Set the operation mode selector to L SOURCE and then press B TUNER on the remote control to select “TUNER” as the input source. Program type Descriptions NEWS News Press C BAND repeatedly to select “FM” as the reception band. AFFAIRS Current affairs INFO General information Press G PTY SEEK MODE on the remote control to set this unit to the PTY SEEK mode. The name of the program type or “NEWS” flashes in the front panel display. SPORT Sports EDUCATE Education DRAMA Drama CULTURE Culture SCIENCE Science VARIED Light entertainment POP M Popular music ROCK M Rock music M.O.R. M Middle-of-the-road music (easylistening) LIGHT M Light classics CLASSICS Serious classics OTHER M Other music NEWS Flashes y To cancel the PTY SEEK mode, press G PTY SEEK MODE on the remote control again. 54 En Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only) 5 Press G PTY SEEK START on the remote control to start searching for all the available Radio Data System preset stations. The name of the selected program type flashes and the PTY HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel display while this unit is searching for stations. POP M Flashes PTY HOLD Lights up y To stop searching for stations, press G PTY SEEK START on the remote control again. • This unit stops searching for stations when a station broadcasting the selected program type is found. • If the station found is not the one you desire, press G PTY SEEK START again to resume searching for another station broadcasting the same program type. Use this feature to receive the EON (enhanced other networks) data service of the Radio Data System station network. Once you select one of the 4 Radio Data System program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or SPORT), this unit automatically searches for all the available preset stations that are scheduled to broadcast the EON data service of the selected program type for a certain duration of time. When the scheduled EON data service starts, this unit automatically switches to the local station broadcasting the EON data service and then switches back to the national station once the EON data service ends. Notes • You can use this feature only when the EON data service is available. • The EON indicator lights up in the front panel display only when the EON data service is being received from a Radio Data System station. 1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. 2 Make sure the EON indicator is lit in the front panel display. If the EON indicator is not lit in the front panel display, select another Radio Data System program so that the EON indicator lights up. BASIC OPERATION Notes Using the enhanced other networks (EON) data service EON 3 Press G EON on the remote control repeatedly to select one of the 4 Radio Data System program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO or SPORT). The name of the selected program type appears in the front panel display. NEWS Lights up To cancel the EON feature, press EON on the remote control repeatedly until the name of the program type disappears and “EON OFF” appears in the front panel display. 55 En English y USING IPOD™ Using iPod™ Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 23), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 46). Notes • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. y • For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other components” on page 84. • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 107. • Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK indicator lights up in the front panel display. • Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. • Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “STANDBY CHARGE” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 81). The DOCK indicator turns on while this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod when this unit is in the standby mode. Controlling iPod™ ■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse mode You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode). You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD of this unit. You can browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to suit your personal preferences. ■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote mode y y • The name of the song being played also appears in the front panel display according to the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79). • You can select the amount of time the iPod menu and play information is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSDSOURCE” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79). • You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod. • Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod. Notes You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play, stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without the aid of the OSD of this unit. • Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod. • The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your iPod. • There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are replaced with underscores “_”. • The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in the OSD. Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between the “Settings” parameter settings. • You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your iPod in the OSD. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy watching the photos or video clips stored on your iPod. 56 En Using iPod™ 1 Set the operation mode selector to L SOURCE and then press R DISPLAY on the remote control. The following display appears in the OSD. iPod Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers Settings ■ The function of the play information display 7 All 1 2 3 4 Top > > > > > > > iPod[Play] 1/9 FrankieZipper Made-to-order RoadtoIndia ||||||||;;;;;;;;;;;; 0:51-7:44 5 6 8 9 1 Track number/total tracks 2 Name of the artist 2 3 Name of the album 4 Name of the song 5 Progress bar 6 Elapsed time 7 Shuffle and repeat icons 8 h (playback), e (pausing), f (search forward) and w (search backward) BASIC OPERATION Press D k / n / l / h to navigate the iPod menu and then press D ENTER to begin playback of the selected song. Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums (albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres), Composers (composers), Settings (settings) • Playlists > Songs • Artists > Albums > Songs • Albums > Songs • Songs • Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs • Composers > Albums > Songs • Settings > Shuffle, Repeat 9 Remaining time Shuffle Shuffle Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in random order. Choices: Off, Songs, Albums • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random order. • Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in random order. y When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” appears in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled. Repeat Repeat Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of songs. Choices: Off, One, All • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song. • Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs. y When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” or “ ” appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. 1 All English 57 En RECORDING Recording Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. Caution The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. Notes • When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • TONE CONTROL (see page 48) and VOLUME settings, the speaker level (see page 72) and the sound field programs (see page 42) do not affect recorded material. • The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals. • A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can only record an S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR. • The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. 1 Turn on all the connected components. 2 Rotate the I INPUT selector (or press one of the input selector buttons (B)) to select the source component you want to record from. 58 En 3 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. 4 Start recording on the recording component. ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS Advanced sound configurations Changing sound field parameter settings 4 You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory settings. Although you do not have to change the initial factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. PARAMETER Cursor Note You cannot change the sound field parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 80). If you want to change the sound field parameter values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Set the operation mode selector to L AMP and then press R DISPLAY on the remote control. The following status screen appears in the OSD. MOVIE Sci-Fi INPUT:DVD A.SEL:HDMI NIGHT:OFF [RETURN]:STATUS y • For details about the function and control range of each sound field parameter, see page 61. • When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the sound field parameter name in the OSD. • The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD. In this case, press D k / n to scroll through pages. • If you press and hold D l / h to change the sound field parameter value, the initial factory settings are shown momentarily in the front panel display. • Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group (see page 80). • You can select the amount of time that the current status is displayed in the OSD by using the “OSD-AMP” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79). 5 3 Press one of the sound field program selector buttons (U) repeatedly to select the desired sound field program you want to adjust. MOVIE Sci-Fi 1/2 PROLOGIC DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;16ms P.ROOM.SIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;20ms . ADVANCED OPERATION STATUSVOL:-40.0dB Press D k / n to select the desired sound field parameter and then D l / h to change the selected sound field parameter value. Press R DISPLAY to turn off the sound field parameter display. English 59 En Advanced sound configurations ■ Basic configuration of sound field programs y To change sound field parameter settings, see page 59 for details. Adjusting the vertical dialogue position (DIALG.LIFT) Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is at the center of the video monitor screen. Each sound field program has some parameters defining the characteristics of the program. To customize the selected sound field program, adjust “DSP LEVEL” and/ or “DIALG.LIFT” first, and then try other parameters. Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound field programs (DSP LEVEL) Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect sounds) to the original source sound to create sound field in the listening room. Use the “DSP LEVEL” parameter to adjust the level of the effect sounds. The ideal dialogue position. If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video monitor screen, increase the value of “DIALG.LIFT”. Move up to the ideal dialogue position. The DSP effect sound level is low. The DSP effect sound level is high. Adjust “DSP LEVEL” as follows: Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 “0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the highest position. Increase the value of “DSP LEVEL” when Notes • The effect sound of the selected sound field program is too weak. • You cannot recognize any difference between the sound field programs. • “DIALG.LIFT” is only available only “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” is set to “PRESENCE” (see page 72). • You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial dialogue position. Decrease the value of “DSP LEVEL” when • The sound is vague. • You feel that the additional sound effect is excessive. Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB 60 En Advanced sound configurations ■ Sound field parameters for the advanced configurations Use the following sound field parameters to customize sound field programs in detail. y To change sound field parameter settings, see page 59 for details. Sound field parameter Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. y When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend adjusting the corresponding room size parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP programs. Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY) 1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY) Source sound Level Level Early reflections Level INIT.DLY P.INIT.DLY S.INIT.DLY SB INI.DLY Features Time Time Time Delay Delay Delay Sound source ADVANCED OPERATION Reflection face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms English 61 En Advanced sound configurations Sound field parameter ROOM SIZE P.ROOM SIZE S.ROOM SIZE SB ROOM SIZE Features Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room. y When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend adjusting the corresponding initial delay parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the CINEMA DSP programs. Control range: 0.1 to 2.0 Time Early reflections Level Level Level Source sound Time Time Sound source Small value = 0.1 LIVENESS S.LIVENESS SB LIVENESS Large value = 2.0 Liveness. Surround and surround back sound field liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room. Control range: 0 to 10 Source sound Time Small reflected sound Small value = 0 62 En Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Large reflected sound Large value = 10 Advanced sound configurations Sound field parameter REV.TIME Features Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s Source sound Reverberation Reverberation Early reflections 60 dB 60 dB REV.TIME Sound source REV.TIME Short reverberation REV.TIME Long reverberation Small value = 1.0 s REV.DELAY 60 dB Large value = 5.0 s Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment. ADVANCED OPERATION Level Control range: 0 to 250 ms Source sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV.DELAY Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Control range: 0 to 100% Level REV.LEVEL REV.TIME Source sound REV. LEVEL English Time 63 En Advanced sound configurations Sound field parameter 2ch Stereo DIRECT Features 2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and the DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources. Choices: AUTO, OFF y • Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 48). • Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, the DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB. • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. • The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the subwoofer in the following cases: – “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 70). – “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 71) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” (see page 70). 7ch Stereo CT LEVEL SL LEVEL SR LEVEL SB LEVEL PL LEVEL PR LEVEL 7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode. The available parameters differ depending on the setting of the speakers. 2ch Enhancer 7ch Enhancer 2-channel and 7-channel Compressed Music Enhancer effect level. The high-frequency signals of some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set the effect level to “LOW”. Control range: 0 to 100% Choices: HIGH, LOW • Select “HIGH” for a high effect level. • Select “LOW” for a low effect level. ■ Selecting decoders used with sound field programs (Decoder Type) Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”). See page 45 for details about MOVIE sound field program. Available decoders Decoder Functions PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources PLIIx Movie PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71). Neo:6 Cinema 64 En DTS processing for movie sources Selecting decoders ■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel sources (surround decode mode) Use this feature to play back sources with selected decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multichannels. Set the operation mode selector to L AMP and then press U SUR. DECODE repeatedly on the remote control to select the desired surround decoder. You can select from the following modes depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. y You can change the decoder parameter settings. Press DISPLAY and then D k / n repeatedly on the remote control to select the desired decoder parameter. You can change the value of the selected parameter by pressing D l / h repeatedly on the remote control. Advanced sound configurations ■ Decoder descriptions Remote control button Category of the program Name of the program SURROUND DECODE PLIIxMusic PLIIMusic SUR.DECODE 9 Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71). PANORAMA DIMENSION CENTER WIDTH Program description Available sound field parameters (see page 66) SUR.DECODE 9 SURROUND DECODE PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. SUR.DECODE 9 SURROUND DECODE PLIIx Movie PL II Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71). SUR.DECODE 9 SURROUND DECODE PLIIx Music PL II Music ADVANCED OPERATION Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71). PANORAMA SUR.DECODE 9 DIMENSION SURROUND DECODE CENTER WIDTH PLIIx Game PL II Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 71). SUR.DECODE 9 SURROUND DECODE Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie sources. SUR.DECODE 9 SURROUND DECODE Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music sources. C. IMAGE y When you select the surround decode mode for Dolby Digital, DTS or DTS 96/24 sources, this unit automatically selects “SURROUND DECODE Dolby Digital”, “SURROUND DECODE DTS” or “SURROUND DECODE DTS 96/24” program. English 65 En Advanced sound configurations Decoder parameter descriptions Decoder parameter Features PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music PANORAMA Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music DIMENSION Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Choices: OFF, ON Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front) Initial setting: STD (standard) PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music CENTER WIDTH Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center channel output towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) Initial setting: 3 DTS Neo:6 Music C.IMAGE DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. Control range: 0.0 to 1.0 Initial setting: 0.3 66 En CUSTOMIZING THIS UNIT (MANUAL SETUP) Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 28). ■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Parameter Features Page Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, the crossover frequency, and the assignment of the EXTRA SP terminal. 70 B)SPEAKER LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 72 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the distance of each speaker. 73 D)EQUALIZER Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 73 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 74 F)DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 74 G)AUDIO SET Adjusts the muting level, audio delay, maximum volume level and initial volume level. 74 H)HDMI SET Selects the component to play back HDMI audio signals. 75 I)EXTD SUR. Selects the mode of the decoders for the 6.1/7.1-channel playback. 75 ADVANCED OPERATION A)SPEAKER SET Input menu 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. Parameter Features Page A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used. 76 B)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input source. 77 C)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each input source. 78 D)DECODER MODE Selects the input mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit. 78 E)MULTI CH SET Sets the input channel numbers and other parameters of the input multi channel. 78 English 67 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Option menu 3 OPTION MENU Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters. Parameter Features Page A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals. 79 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings. 80 C)AUDIO SELECT Designates the default audio input jack select setting mode for the input sources when you turn on the power of this unit. 80 D)PARAM.INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 80 E)ZONE 2 SET Adjusts the Zone 2 parameters. 80 F)DOCK SET Selects whether this unit charges the battery of the connected iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode. 81 ■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO Use this feature to check audio and video signal information (see page 40). 68 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Using SET MENU 3 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. y • You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is reproducing sound. • Press E RETURN to return to the previous menu level. 1 MANUAL SETUP MANUAL SETUP 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 . A)SPEAKER SET B)SPEAKER LEVEL C)SP DISTANCE D)EQUALIZER E)LFE LEVEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP .A;SIGNAL INFO 2/2 [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p 4 1 SOUND MENU . F)DYNAMIC RANGE G)AUDIO SET H)HDMI SET I)EXTD SUR. p p Set the operation mode selector to L AMP and then press N SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. SET MENU Press D k / n repeatedly and then press D ENTER to select and enter the desired menu. The following displays are examples where “SOUND MENU” is selected. Press D k / n repeatedly and then press D ENTER to select and enter the desired submenu. The following display is an example where “LFE LEVEL” is selected. p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter SOUND MENU E)LFE LEVEL 2 . SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB Press D k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP” and then D ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”. The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the OSD. p Press D k / n to select the desired parameter and then D l / h to change the parameter settings. 6 Press N SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. . 1 SOUND MENU 2 INPUT MENU 3 OPTION MENU ADVANCED OPERATION 5 MANUAL SETUP p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust English 69 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) 1 SOUND MENU Use this feature to manually adjust speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are set automatically when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 28). MANUAL SETUP MANUAL SETUP 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 1 SOUND MENU 2/2 . F)DYNAMIC RANGE G)AUDIO SET H)HDMI SET I)EXTD SUR. p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p p . A)SPEAKER SET B)SPEAKER LEVEL C)SP DISTANCE D)EQUALIZER E)LFE LEVEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings. SOUND MENU . EXTRA SP ASSIGN ZONE2 >FRONT B PRESENCE NONE FRONT B;;;;FRONT PRIORITY;;;;;--ZONE2 SET Not Available Extra speakers assignment EXTRA SP ASSIGN Selects the function of the speakers connected to the EXTRA SP terminals. Choices: FRONT B, ZONE2, PRESENCE, NONE When you use the alternative front speaker system (see page 38) Select “FRONT B”. When you use the Zone 2 speakers (see page 96) Select “ZONE2” to set the function of the speakers to the Zone 2 speakers. When you use the presence speakers (see page 12) Select “PRESENCE” to set the function of the speakers to the presence speakers. When you do not use the EXTRA SP terminals Select “NONE” to deactivate the EXTRA SP terminals. Notes • This parameter shares the value with the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” parameter in “AUTO SETUP”. • If you select “ON” in “BI-AMP” (see page 101), you cannot select “PRESENCE” or “ZONE2” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN”. • After changing the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” setting, carry out “AUTO SETUP” again (see page 28). 70 En FRONT B speakers setting FRONT B The “FRONT B” parameter is available only when you set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B”. Use this feature to select the location of the FRONT B speakers. Choices: FRONT, ZONE B • Select “FRONT” to turn FRONT A and B on or off when the FRONT B speakers are set in the main room. • Select “ZONE B” if the FRONT B speakers are set in another room. If FRONT A is turned off and FRONT B is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and this unit outputs sound at the FRONT B terminals only. Notes • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the sound is output from both the headphones and the EXTRA SP terminals when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”. • If a DSP program is selected when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 46). Presence/Surround back channel priority PRIORITY The “PRIORITY” parameter is available only when you set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “PRESENCE”. Use this feature to prioritize either the presence or the surround back speakers when playing sources that contain surround back channel signals using the CINEMA DSP sound field programs. Choices: PRNS, SUR. B • Select “PRNS” to use the presence speakers even when surround back channel signals are input. The signals for the surround back channels will be output from the surround speakers. • Select “SUR. B” to use the surround back speakers when surround back channel signals are detected in a CINEMA DSP program. The presence channel signals are output from the front speakers. Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Woofer section of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large Woofer section of a speaker is smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: SMALL, LARGE SOUND MENU SOUND MENU FRONT SP SMALL >LARGE SUR. L/R SP NONE >SML LRG When the front speakers are large Select “LARGE” (large). When the surround speakers are large Select “LRG” (large). When the front speakers are small Select “SMALL” (small). When the surround speakers are small Select “SML” (small). Note When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 70), you can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of “FRONT SP” is set to a setting other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit automatically changes the value to “LARGE”. Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG When you do not use the surround speakers Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 46), and “SUR. B L/R SP” is automatically set to “NONE”. Surround back left/right speakers SUR. B L/R SP Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2 SOUND MENU ADVANCED OPERATION SUR.B L/R SP SOUND MENU CENTER SP SMLx1 >SMLx2 NONE >SML LRG When the center speaker is large Select “LRG” (large). When the center speaker is small Select “SML” (small). When you do not use the center speaker Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. LRGx1 When the surround back left and right speakers are large Select “LRGx2” (large x 2). When the single surround back speaker is large Select “LRGx1” (large x 1). When the surround back left and right speakers are small Select “SMLx2” (small x 2). When the single surround back speaker is small Select “SMLx1” (small x 1). When you do not use the surround back speakers Select “NONE” (none). The surround back channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. English 71 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) LFE/Bass out LFE/BASS OUT Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE SOUND MENU SOUND MENU LFE/BASS OUT SUBWOOFER PHASE SWFR FRNT>BOTH When a subwoofer is connected to this unit and you want to get natural bass sound Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. When a subwoofer is connected to this unit and you want to get rich bass sound Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the front left and right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting. When you do not use a subwoofer Select “FRNT” (front). The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting. Bass crossover CROSSOVER Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 71). All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 71). Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz SOUND MENU >NORMAL REVERSE • Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. ■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL Use this feature to manually adjust the output level of each speaker. Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB SOUND MENU . SPEAKER LEVEL B)SPEAKER LEVEL 1/2 -__________+ FL;;;;;;;;;; FR;;;;;;;;;; C;;;;;;;;;; SWFR;;;;;;;;;; Adjusted speaker FL Front left speaker FR Front right speaker C Center speaker SWFR Subwoofer SL Surround left speaker SR Surround right speaker SBR Surround back right speaker SBL Surround back left speaker PL Presence left speaker PR Presence right speaker CROSSOVER Notes FREQ;;;80Hz 72 En • The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. • Instead of “SBL” and “SBR”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 71). Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE ■ Equalizer D)EQUALIZER Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer or the graphic equalizer. Equalizer type select EQ TYPE SELECT Use this feature to select the type of equalizer. Choices: AUTO PEQ, CENTER GEQ, EQ OFF SOUND MENU D)EQUALIZER SOUND MENU . C)SP DISTANCE 1/2 Adjusted speaker • Select “AUTO PEQ” to use the parametric equalizer adjusted in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 28). • Select “CENTER GEQ” to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band graphic equalizer so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches that of the front left and right speakers. Press D k / n to display the graphic equalizer screen. • Select “EQ OFF” to deactivate the equalizing feature. Note When you carry out “AUTO SETUP” in advance (see page 28), “AUTO PEQ” is automatically selected as the default setting. Test tone TEST SOUND MENU p . TEST >OFF ON -______+ 100Hz ;;;;;; 300Hz ;;;;;; 1kHz ;;;;;; 3kHz ;;;;;; 10kHz ;;;;;; [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust Front left speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SWFR Subwoofer SUR. L Surround left speaker SUR. R Surround right speaker SB L Surround back left speaker SB R Surround back right speaker PRNS L Presence left speaker PRNS R Presence right speaker 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB p FRONT L ADVANCED OPERATION Speaker distances Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft) Initial setting: FRONT L/FRONT R/CENTER/SWFR/SUR. L/SUR. R/ PRNS L/PRNS R: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) SB L/SB R: 2.10 m (7.0 ft) p Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: [U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft) [Other models]: meters (m) • Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters. • Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet. [ ]/[]:CT GEQ [p]/[[]:Select p p p . UNIT;;;;;;meters FRONT L;;;3.00m FRONT R;;;3.00m CENTER;;;;3.00m SWFR;;;;;;3.00m [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust SP DISTANCE EQ TYPE SELECT CENTER GEQ Use this feature to make adjustments for “CENTER GEQ” while listening to a test tone. Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently selected source component. • Select “ON” to output test tones from the center and front left speakers. Notes English • The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. • Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/ R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 71). 73 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Center graphic equalizer CENTER GEQ Use to match the tonal quality of the center speaker with that of the front left and right speakers. You can adjust 5 frequency bands (100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz and 10 kHz). Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB SOUND MENU 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB p p TEST >OFF ON -______+ . 100Hz ;;;;;; 300Hz ;;;;;; 1kHz ;;;;;; 3kHz ;;;;;; 10kHz ;;;;;; [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust ■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Choices: MIN, STD, MAX • Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select “STD” (standard) for general use. • Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. SOUND MENU F)DYNAMIC RANGE y Press D k / n to select a frequency band and D l / h to adjust the selected frequency band. . SP: MIN STD>MAX HP: MIN STD>MAX The “CENTER GEQ” parameter can be adjusted only when “CENTER GEQ” is selected in “EQ TYPE SELECT”. ■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Control range: –20 to 0 dB Control step: 1 dB SOUND MENU Speaker SP Adjusts the speaker compression. Headphone HP Adjusts the headphone compression. ■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this unit. SOUND MENU G)AUDIO SET . MUTING TYPE;FULL A.DELAY;;;;;;0ms MAX VOL.;+16.5dB INI.VOL.;;;;;OFF p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select p E)LFE LEVEL p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select Note . SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust Speaker SPEAKER Adjusts the speaker LFE level. Headphone HEADPHONE Adjusts the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70), some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack. 74 En Muting type MUTING TYPE Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 40). Choices: FULL, –20dB • Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio output. • Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio delay AUDIO DELAY Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Control range: 0 to 160 ms Control step: 1 ms Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Maximum volume MAX VOL. Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the main zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume range is 16.5 dB to –80.0 dB. However, when “MAX VOL.” is set to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes –5.0 dB to –80.0 dB. Control range: 16.5 dB, 15.0 dB to –30.0 dB Control step: 5.0 dB Notes • When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “MAX VOL.” setting. • The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “Initial Volume” setting. For example, if “INI VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and “MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time. • Use “MAX VOL.” in “ZONE2 SET” to set the initial volume level in Zone 2 (see page 81). Initial volume INI VOL. Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone when the power of this unit is turned on. Choices: Off, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB Control step: 0.5 dB • The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI VOL.” setting. • Use “INI VOL.” in “ZONE2 SET” to set the initial volume level in Zone 2 (see page 81). ■ HDMI setting H)HDMI SET Use this feature to select the component to play back HDMI audio signals. The HDMI video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. ■ Extended surround decoders I)EXTD SUR. Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders by using the connected surround back speakers. SOUND MENU I)EXTD SUR. . MODE;;;;;;;;AUTO [p]/[[]:Select Mode MODE Use this feature to select the mode of the decoder driving. Choices: AUTO, ON, OFF • Select “AUTO” to activate the optimum decoder to play back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels when a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is input. • Select “ON” to play back multi-channel sources using the selected decoder type in “TYPE”. • Select “OFF” not to use the decoders to create 6.1/7.1 channels. Decoder type TYPE SOUND MENU I)EXTD SUR. . MODE;;;;;;;;;;ON TYPE;;;PLIIxMovie p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select H)HDMI SET SUPPORT AUDIO: RX-V661 [p]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return Use this feature to select the decoders used to play back multi-channel sources when you select “ON” in “MODE”. Choices: PLIIxMovie, PLIIxMusic, EX/ES, EX • Select “PLIIxMovie” to play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder. • Select “PLIIx Music” to play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. • Select “EX/ES” to play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoder. • Select “EX” to play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. 75 En English Support audio SUPPORT AUDIO Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. Choices: RX-V661, OTHER • Select “RX-V661” to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. • Select “OTHER” to play back HDMI audio signals on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack. p SOUND MENU ADVANCED OPERATION Notes Note Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) y Use this feature to activate the desired decoder manually when this unit cannot detect the signal flag encoded to the input sources correctly. Notes Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. MANUAL SETUP 2 INPUT MENU p . A)I/O ASSIGNMENT B)INPUT RENAME C)VOLUME TRIM D)DECODER MODE E)MULTI CH SET [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p • The available decoders vary depending on the setting of the speakers and the input sources. • 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible in the following cases: – when “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 71) or “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 71) is set to “NONE”. – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is being played. – when the source being played does not contain surround left and right channel signals. – when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – when the stereo playback, Compressed Music Enhancer (see page 46) or Pure Direct (see page 48) mode is selected. – when “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” (see page 101). • When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to “AUTO”. 2 INPUT MENU ■ Input/output assignment A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). y The input source name in parentheses indicates the default assigned input source. For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C CMPNT-V INPUT Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR [B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR [C] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR INPUT MENU CMPNT-V INPUT . [A];;;;; DVD ( DVD ) [B];;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL)) [C];;;;; DVR ( DVR ) 76 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 OPTICAL OUT Choices: (1) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR, DVR For HDMI IN jacks 1 and 2 HDMI IN Choices: [IN1] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR [IN2] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR INPUT MENU INPUT MENU HDMI IN . [IN1];;; DVD ( DVD ) [IN2];;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL)) OPTICAL OUT . (1);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R ) ■ Input rename B)INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the input source that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display. Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. DVD -> MY DVD [[]/[[]:Position [ ]/[ ]:Chara. y 1 Press one of the input selector buttons (B) on the remote control to select the input source you want to change the name of. 2 Press D l / h to place the “_” (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 5 and 6 COAXIAL IN Choices: (5) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR (6) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR 3 Press D k / n to select the character you want to use and then press D l / h to move to the next space. ADVANCED OPERATION • This feature is useful when you change the input or output assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks. • You can only rename DOCK when iPod is stationed in the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit. OPTICAL IN . (2);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R ) (3);;;;; DVD ( DVD ) (4);;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL ) p INPUT MENU B)INPUT RENAME p For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4 OPTICAL IN Choices: (2) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, DVR, VCR (3) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, DVR, VCR (4) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, DVR, VCR INPUT MENU Notes INPUT MENU • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press D n to change the character in the following order, or press D k to go in the reverse order: A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.), space. COAXIAL IN . (5);;;;; CD ( CD ) (6);;;;; DVD ( DVD ) (4);;;;;DTV/CBLTA Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each input source. 5 Press D ENTER on the remote control to exit from “INPUT RENAME”. 77 En English 4 Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) ■ Volume Trim C)VOLUME TRIM Use this feature to adjust the output level of each input source. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Choices: TUNER, PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/ CBL, VCR, DVR, V-AUX, DOCK, MULTI CH Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB ■ Multi channel input settings E)MULTI CH SET Use this feature to set the function of the multi channel input. INPUT MENU E)MULTI CH SET . BGV;;;;; LAST INPUT CH;;;;;6CH p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [[]/[[]:Select INPUT MENU C)VOLUME TRIM MY DVD DVD -> 0.0dB [[]/[[]:Adjust [RETURN]:Exit y • You can adjust the value for DOCK only when iPod is stationed to the Yamaha Universal Dock connected to this unit. • The default name (“DVD” in the display example above) and the new name (“MY DVD”) of the selected input source appears in the OSD. ■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE INPUT MENU D)DECODER MODE . >AUTO CD MD/CD-R DVD 1/2 LAST ;;;;AUTO ;;;;AUTO ;;;;AUTO BGV BGV Use this feature to select the video source played in the background of the sources input from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Choices: DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR, LAST, OFF • Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last selected video source as the background video source. • Select “OFF” to set this unit not to play the video source in the background. Input channels INPUT CH Use this setting to select the number of channels input from an external decoder. Choices: 6CH, 8CH • Select “6CH” if you input 6-channel signals. • Select “8CH” if you input 8-channel signals. Front input FRONT p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [[]/[[]:Select INPUT MENU E)MULTI CH SET DTS decoder prioritize setting Choices: AUTO, DTS • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “DTS” if you want this unit to select DTS as the input mode. 78 En [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [[]/[[]:Select p • Select “AUTO” to if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate decoder mode. • Select “LAST” to if you want this unit to automatically select the last decoder mode used for the connected input source. . BGV;;;;; LAST INPUT CH;;;;;8CH FRONT;;; DVD p Decoder select mode Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST If you selected “8CH” in “INPUT CH”, you can select the analog jacks at which the front signals from an external decoder will be input. Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, VCR y See page 22 for the connection information. Note The “FRONT” parameter appears only when you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH”. Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) 3 OPTION MENU Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters. MANUAL SETUP 3 OPTION MENU MANUAL SETUP 1/2 . A)DISPLAY SET B)MEMORY GUARD C)AUDIO SELECT D)PARAM. INI 3 OPTION MENU 2/2 . E)ZONE2 SET F)DOCK SET p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET OPTION MENU A)DISPLAY SET OPTION MENU 1/2 . DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0 VIDEO CONV.;;;ON OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0 2/2 [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [[]/[[]:Select p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [[]/[[]:Select A)DISPLAY SET . OSD-SOURCE;;;30s OSD-AMP;;;;;;30s FL SCROLL;;;CONT Video conversion VIDEO CONV. Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” to convert composite, S-video and component video signals interchangeably. • Select “OFF” not to convert any signals. Notes • This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line video signals interchangeably. • The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are converted to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. • Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”. • When non-standard video signals (such as video signals from a game console) are input, this unit may not convert the signals even if you set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”. Source feature OSD display time OSD-SOURCE Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the iPod menu in the OSD after you perform a certain operation. Choices: ON, 10s, 30s • Select “ON” to display the OSD continuously during an operation. • Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation. • Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform a certain operation. Amplifier function OSD display time OSD-AMP Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the status and sound field parameters information screen after you perform a certain operation. Choices: ON, 10s, 30s • Select “ON” to display the OSD constantly during an operation. • Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation. • Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform a certain operation. ADVANCED OPERATION Dimmer DIMMER Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: – 4 to 0 Control step: 1 • Press D l to make the front panel display dimmer. • Press D h to make the front panel display brighter. OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward) Control step: 1 Initial setting: 0 • Press D l to raise the position of the OSD. • Press D h to lower the position of the OSD. Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL Use this feature to set whether to display the information (such as a song title or a channel name) in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once when “DOCK” is selected as the input source. Choices: CONT, ONCE • Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner. • Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once. English 79 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON OPTION MENU B)MEMORY GUARD >OFF ON [[]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return • Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD” feature. • Select “ON” to protect: – sound field program parameters – all “SET MENU” items – all speaker levels – SCENE template parameters ■ Parameter initialization D)PARAM.INI Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial factory settings. Press the corresponding sound field program selector buttons on the remote control to select the sound field program that you want to initialize. An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field program names that have been changed from their initial factory settings. Choices: CLASSICAL, LIVE/CLUB, ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE, STEREO, ENHANCER, SUR. DECODE OPTION MENU D)PARAM. INI CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB *ENTERTAINMENT *MOVIE STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE Press DSP Key Note When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust any other “SET MENU” items. ■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack select setting for the input sources when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST OPTION MENU C)AUDIO SELECT >AUTO LAST Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize a sound field program group. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”. ■ Zone 2 settings E)ZONE2 SET [[]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return E)ZONE2 SET . MAX VOL.;+16.5dB INI.VOL.;;;;;OFF p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [[]/[[]:Select p • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate audio input jack select setting. • Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically select the last audio input jack select setting used for the connected input source. OPTION MENU Zone 2 Maximum volume MAX VOL. Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the Zone 2. Control range: 16.5 dB, 15.0 dB to – 30.0 dB Control step: 5.0 dB Notes • The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI VOL.” setting. For example, when “INI VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and then “MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time. • The “MAX VOL.” setting does not affect the output level at the “ZONE 2 OUT” jacks. 80 En Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP) Zone 2 Initial volume INI VOL. Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2 when the power of this unit is turned on. Choices: Off, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Notes • The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI VOL.” setting. • When you select “FRONT B”, “PRNS” or “NONE” in “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” (see page 70), “Zone 2 SP Not Assigned” appears in the OSD and the “ZONE2 SET” parameter is not available. • The “INI VOL.” setting does not affect the output level at the ZONE 2 OUT jacks. ■ iPod universal dock setting F)DOCK SET OPTION MENU F)DOCK SET STANDBY CHARGE: AUTO [[]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return ADVANCED OPERATION Charge on standby STANDBY CHARGE Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode (see page 56). Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select “AUTO” to charge the battery of the stationed iPod when this unit is turned on and in the standby mode. • Select “OFF” to charge the battery of the stationed iPod only when this unit is turned on. English 81 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Remote control features In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 85). Using the remote control for the SCENE feature ■ Controlling the input source components in the SCENE mode You can operate both this unit and the input source component by using the remote control. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 85). 1 2 If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE template, you must set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control to operate the input source component correctly. Press the desired A SCENE button on the remote control. 1 Press the desired buttons in the * area below to control the input source component of the selected SCENE template. Press and hold the A SCENE button and the desired input selector button (A). The transmit indicator (X) flashes twice. 2 Keep holding down the buttons pressed in step 2 until “OK” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER SCENE SCENE buttons 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD * AMP + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – SOURCE TV MUTE LEVEL TV INPUT PRESET/CH TITLE TV Set to SOURCE MUTE SET MENU MENU AUDIO BAND PURE DIRECT ENTER A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 5 6 7 9 0 + 10 MOVIE 4 NIGHT 8 SLEEP ENT REC FREQ/TEXT OFF ON EON MACRO MODE- PTY SEEK- START LEARN CLEAR RENAME Note These buttons control the input source component. See page 84 for details of the function of each button. 82 En Note If the setting of the input source is not successful, “NG” appears in the display window (J). In this case, repeat the setting procedure. SELECT * ■ Setting the input source of the customized SCENE template on the remote control Remote control features Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling a TV Set the operation mode selector to L AMP to control this unit. Set the operation mode selector to LTV to control your TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for DTV/CBL or PHONO (see page 85). When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and PHONO, priority is given to the one set for DTV/CBL. *2 POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY *1 POWER *1 SCENE 1 2 PHONO MULTI CH IN 3 V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R DTV/CBL DVR VCR POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER SCENE 1 2 PHONO MULTI CH IN CD V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DVD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD 4 3 4 SELECT SELECT AMP AMP + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME SOURCE SOURCE – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE *1 TV *1 – – TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL SET MENU MENU – TV MUTE PRESET/CH TITLE AUDIO SET MENU MENU PURE DIRECT PURE DIRECT ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT A/B/C/D/E LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN STRAIGHT 2 3 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 5 6 7 9 0 + 10 DISPLAY RETURN CLASSICAL MOVIE LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 2 3 4 1 NIGHT STEREO 8 5 6 7 9 0 + 10 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE ENT ON EON MACRO FREQ/TEXT MODE- PTY SEEK- START LEARN CLEAR OFF RENAME Notes *1 *2 8 ENT REC REC FREQ/TEXT 4 NIGHT SLEEP SLEEP OFF MOVIE ADVANCED OPERATION 1 STEREO *1 DISPLAY RETURN CLASSICAL AUDIO BAND BAND *2 TV These buttons always control this unit regardless of the operation mode selector position. *2 These buttons control this unit only when the component operation mode selector is set to L AMP. ON EON MACRO MODE- PTY SEEK- START LEARN CLEAR RENAME Notes *1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the operation mode selector position. Remote control *2 Digital TV/Cable TV TV POWER Turns on or off the power. TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. TV CH +/– Changes the channel number. TV MUTE Mutes the audio output. TV INPUT Changes the input source. These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is set to LTV. For details, see the “TV” column on page 84. English 83 En Remote control features ■ Controlling other components Set the operation mode selector to L SOURCE to control other components selected with the input selector buttons (B), or . You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 85). The following table shows the function of each control button used to control other components assigned to each input selector button (B), or . Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. 1 POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER SCENE 1 2 PHONO MULTI CH IN 3 4 V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE 2 3 4 5 6 LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MENU AUDIO BAND PURE DIRECT ENTER A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 2 1 STEREO 3 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 5 6 7 9 0 + 10 MOVIE 4 7 8 9 NIGHT 8 SLEEP ENT 0 REC FREQ/TEXT EON MODE- PTY SEEK- START SOURCE y OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME TV The remote control has 12 modes (input areas) to control components so that the remote control can operate up to 12 different components. DVD player/ DVD recorder 1 2 3 AV POWER Power *1 VCR Cable TV/ Satellite tuner TV LD player CD player MD recorder/ Tape deck CD recorder Tuner Power *1 Power *1 VCR power Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Title *2 TITLE Title Title Title ENTER Menu enter Menu select Menu select Menu up Menu up Menu up Preset up (1 to 8) Up Menu down Preset down (1 to 8) Down Preset down (A to E) Previous menu Preset up (A to E) Subsequent menu PRESET/CH k PRESET/CH n Menu down Menu down Band A/B/C/D/E l Menu left Menu left Menu left A/B/C/D/E h Menu right Menu right Menu right 4 5 6 7 8 0 A Power *1 iPod Subsequent menu Direction A/B RETURN Return Return Return Return 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons ll Search backward Search backward DVR search backward *2 DVR search backward *2 Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward *3 hh Search forward Search forward DVR search forward *2 DVR search forward *2 Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward *3 b Skip backward DVR skip backward DVR skip backward Chapter/Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Direction back Skip backward a Skip forward DVR skip forward DVR skip forward Chapter/Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Direction forward Skip forward REC/ DISC SKIP Disc skip (player) Rec Rec (recorder) DVR rec *2 Disc skip Rec Rec DVR rec *2 s Stop Stop DVR stop Stop Stop Stop Stop e Pause Pause DVR pause *2 DVR pause *2 Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause (Play/Pause) *4 p Play Play DVR play *2 DVR play *2 Play Play Play Play (Play/Pause) *4 MENU Menu Menu Menu AUDIO Audio DISPLAY Display Display Display Enter/recall Enter ENT *2 DVR stop *2 Stop Play Previous menu Audio Enter Display Display Display Notes *1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button. These buttons operate your VCR or DVR when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 85). *3 Press and hold to search backward or forward. *4 Simple remote mode (see page 56). *2 84 En Display Remote control features ■ Selecting a component to be controlled You can select a component to be controlled independently of the input source selected with the input selector buttons. Press J SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the desired component. The name of the component to be controlled appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. Setting remote control codes You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for each input area. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. The following table shows the default component (Library: component category) and the remote control code for each input area. SELECT Remote control code default settings ■ Controlling optional components (Option mode) “OPTN” is an optional component control area that can be programmed with remote control functions independently from any input source. This area is useful for programming commands that are to be used only as a part of a macro function or for components that do not have a valid remote control code. To select the option mode, press J SELECT k / n repeatedly until “OPTN” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. Note You cannot set a remote control code for the optional area. See page 87 to program buttons operated within this component control area. Library (component category) Manufacturer Default code PHONO TV – – MULCH CH IN DVD YAMAHA 2100 LD YAMAHA 2200 TAPE YAMAHA 2700 V-AUX/ DOCK TUNER YAMAHA 2606 TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 2602 MD/CD-R CD-R YAMAHA 2400 CD CD YAMAHA 2300 DTV/CBL TV – – DVR DVR YAMAHA 2807 VCR VCR – – DVD DVD YAMAHA 2100 ADVANCED OPERATION SELECT Input area Note You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code. 1 Set the operation mode selector to L SOURCE and then press an input selector button (B), or to select the input area you want to set up. PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD AMP SOURCE TV English 85 En Remote control features 2 Press and hold T LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The library name (ex. L;DVD) and the name of the selected input area (ex. DVD) appear alternately in the display window (J) on the remote control. 4 Press the numeric buttons (F) to enter the four-digit remote control code for the component you want to use. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. LEARN CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 9 0 MOVIE y • You can set a remote control code of a different type of component to an input area. Press D l / h repeatedly to change the library (component category). Library choices: L;DVD, L;DVR, L;LD, L;CD, L;CDR, L;MD, L;TAP (tape), L;TUN (tuner), L;AMP, L;TV, L;CAB (cable), L;SAT (satellite), L;VCR • If you want to setup for another input area, press the input selector button, or , or press J SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the input area. 5 y If you continuously want to set up another code for another component, press the input selector button (B) or , or J SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then repeat steps 2 through 5. Notes • Be sure to press and hold T LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 2. Press D ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if setting was successful. “NG” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. 6 Press T LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN 3 Press D ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected component appears in the display window (J). Note 7 Press p or AV POWER to confirm whether you can control your component using the remote control. “0000” appears in the display window (J) if no code has been set. POWER or AV y If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. Notes • “ERROR” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes for commercially available audio and video components (including Yamaha components). If operation is not possible with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote control function using the learn feature (see “Programming codes from other remote controls” on page 87) or use the remote control supplied with the component. • Functions programmed using the learn feature take priority over remote control code functions. 86 En Remote control features Programming codes from other remote controls 2 STANDBY POWER POWER 4 SCENE POWER 3 CD 2 DVD AV MULTI CH IN VCR MD/CD-R 1 PHONO DVR TUNER TV DTV/CBL V-AUX/DOCK SELECT You can program remote control codes from other remote controls. Use the learn feature if you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not available. You can program the function of other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas in the following illustration. The buttons can be programmed independently for each input area. Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. Other remote control LEVEL POWER POWER TV AV 1 2 STANDBY POWER PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MENU AUDIO 5 to 10 cm BAND PURE DIRECT SCENE ENTER 3 4 A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD DISPLAY RETURN CLASSICAL 1 STEREO LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 2 3 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 5 6 7 9 0 + 10 MOVIE 4 NIGHT 3 8 SLEEP ENT SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME REC SOURCE – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE TV FREQ/TEXT OFF ON EON MACRO MODE- PTY SEEK- START LEARN CLEAR Press T LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the name of the selected input area (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window (J) on the remote control. RENAME LEARN Note 1 Notes • Do not press and hold T LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 3. Set the operation mode selector to L SOURCE and then press an input selector button(B), or to select a an input area. Note Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to L SOURCE. When you set the operation mode selector to L AMP and program a remote control codes from other remote controls, the programmed key cannot operate the amplifier function of this unit. 4 ADVANCED OPERATION The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. Refer to the operating instructions for the other remote control. Press the button for which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. English 87 En Remote control features 5 Press and hold the button you want to program on the other remote control until “OK” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. “NG” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if learning was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. Changing source names in the display window You can change the name of the input source that appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if you want to use a different name than the factory preset. This feature is useful when you have set an input area to control a different component. CD 3 STANDBY 4 POWER SCENE 2 AV MULTI CH IN DVD POWER 1 VCR MD/CD-R TV PHONO DVR TUNER POWER DTV/CBL SELECT V-AUX/DOCK 1 Other remote control Set the operation mode selector to L AMP or L SOURCE and then press an input selector button (B), or to select the input area you want to rename. The name of the selected input area appears in the display window (J). AMP SOURCE y • If you want to program another function, repeat steps 4 and 5. • If you continuously want to program another function for another component, press J SELECT k / n to select the component, and then repeat steps 4 and 5. 6 PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD TV or AMP SOURCE TV Press T LEARN again to exit the learning mode. LEARN 2 Notes • “ERROR” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions. However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for further learning. • Learning may not be possible in the following cases: – when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak. – when the distance between the two remote controls is too great or too small. – when the remote control infrared windows are not facing each other at the appropriate angle. – when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight. – when the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon. 88 En Press T RENAME using a ballpoint pen or similar object. RENAME Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 2. Remote control features 3 Press D k / n to select and enter a character. Pressing D n changes the character as follows: A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon), / (slash), and space. Pressing D k changes the characters in reverse order. PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E Macro programming features The macro programming feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The macro programming feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see page 91). ■ MACRO operations 4 Macro buttons Press D h to move the cursor to the next position. POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER REC SCENE PRESET/CH 1 2 PHONO MULTI CH IN 3 V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD FREQ/TEXT 4 OFF ENTER A/B/C/D/E EON MACRO MODE- PTY SEEK- START LEARN MACRO ON/OFF 1 y ON CLEAR RENAME MACRO Set the T MACRO ON/OFF selector to ON. Press D l to move the cursor to the previous position. 5 Press D ENTER to set the new name. “OK” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if renaming was successful. “NG” appears in the display window(J) on the remote control if renaming was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. y If you continuously want to rename another input area, press the input selector button (B), , or , or press J SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then repeat steps 3 through 5. MACRO LEARN CLEAR 2 Press the desired macro button. 3 Set the T MACRO ON/OFF selector to OFF when you finish to using the macro programming operation. OFF 6 ON ADVANCED OPERATION OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR Press RENAME again to exit the renaming mode. RENAME Notes Note “ERROR” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • While the remote control is running a macro program, it does not accept any other operation until it has completed running the program (the transmission indicator stops flashing). • Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro is operating until the macro operation is complete. y English This feature is useful when you change the input or output assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks. Refer to “Input rename” on page 77. 89 En Remote control features ■ Default macro functions Pressing macro button To automatically transmit these signals in order First Second Third STANDBY STANDBY POWER POWER — — (*1) POWER (*2) TV PHONO PHONO MULCH CH IN MULCH CH IN — — — — — V-AUX/DOCK V-AUX/DOCK TUNER TUNER POWER MD/CD-R (*1) MD/CD-R CD CD DTV/CBL DTV/CBL DVR DVR VCR VCR — (*3) — (MD/CD-R area) (*4) (CD area) (*4) — (DVR area) (*4) (VCR area) (*4) DVD DVD (DVD area) (*4) *1 You can turn on some components (including Yamaha components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC OUTLETS on the rear panel of this unit. Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component. *2 When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV/CBL or PHONO (see page 85), you can turn on the power of your TV without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV/CBL takes priority over the one for PHONO. *3 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode. *4 Playback can be started for any Yamaha remote control-compatible CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the input area of that component (see page 87) or set a remote control code (see page 85). 90 En Remote control features ■ Programming macro operations You can program your own macro and use the macro programming feature to transmit several remote control commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or perform learning operations before programming the macro. Note “AGAIN” appears in the display window (J) if you press a button other than a macro button. 3 Notes • The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again when the programmed macro is cleared. • It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents. • We do not recommend programming continuous operations such as volume control in a macro. 1 Set the operation mode selector to L AMP or L SOURCE and then press T MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. Press the buttons for the functions you want to include in the macro operation in sequence. You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically exits the macro mode. The following example is for programming the following procedure: Step 1 (“MCR 1”): Press POWER. Step 2 (“MCR 2”): Press DVD. Step 3 (“MCR 3”): Press STRAIGHT. MCR 1: POWER POWER POWER TV AV POWER STANDBY 1 SCENE AMP 1 2 PHONO MULTI CH IN 3 LEVEL 4 PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MENU AUDIO BAND PURE DIRECT 3 ENTER V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD SOURCE A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY TV MCR 3: STRAIGHT 2 or MCR 2: DVD MACRO ADVANCED OPERATION AMP SOURCE Indicates the number of macro steps entered TV Note Flashes alternately so you can set the next step If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. 2 Press the macro button you want to use to operate the macro. The macro button name (ex. “M;DVD”) and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window (J) on the remote control. STANDBY POWER PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD Note To change the selected input area, press J SELECT k / n. Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step, whereas J SELECT k / n only changes the selected input area. 4 Press T MACRO again using a ballpoint pen or similar object when the operation sequence you want to program is complete. Note “ERROR” appears in the display window (J) if you press more than one button simultaneously. English 91 En Remote control features Clearing configurations You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned functions, macros, renamed input area names and setup remote control ID. ■ Clearing function sets 3 Press and hold T CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “WAIT” appears in the display window (J). If clearing was successful, “C;OK” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. CLEAR 1 Set the operation mode selector to L AMP or L SOURCE and then press T CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “CLEAR” appears in the display window (J). AMP Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting, if you have set remote control codes). SOURCE TV or CLEAR AMP SOURCE TV Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. 2 Press D k / n to select the clear mode. L;CD (etc.) (L; Name of an input area) Clears all learned functions in the respective input area. The name of a component is shown after a semicolon (;). Press an input selector button to select the input area. L;AMP Clears all learned functions for controlling the amplifier functions of this unit. L;ALL Clears all learned functions. M;ALL Clears all programmed macros. RNAME Clears all renamed source names. FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote to the factory settings. 92 En y Notes • “L;ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to complete. • “C;NG” appears in the display window (J) if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 2. • “ERROR” appears in the display window (J) if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. Remote control features ■ Clearing a learned function You can clear the function learned for a certain button in each control area. 1 3 Set the operation mode selector to L AMP or L SOURCE and then press an input selector button(B), or to select the input area containing the function you want to clear. The selected component name appears in the display window (J). Press and hold T CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object and then press the button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C;OK” appears in the display window (J) if clearing was successful. Once “C;OK” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control, release the ballpoint pen or similar object used to press T CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote control returns to the learning mode. AMP SOURCE TV or PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD MODE- PTY SEEK- START LEARN DTV/CBL AMP DVR VCR CLEAR RENAME DVD SOURCE y TV Press T CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window (J). LEARN 4 Press T LEARN again to exit. ADVANCED OPERATION 2 • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 3. • If you continuously want to clear another function for another component, press J SELECT k / n to select the input area, then repeat step 3. • Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). Notes • “C;NG” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. • “ERROR” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if you press more than one button simultaneously. Notes • Do not press and hold T LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 2. English 93 En Remote control features ■ Clearing a macro function You can clear the function programmed for a certain macro button. 1 2 Set the operation mode selector to L AMP or L SOURCE and then press T MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. Press and hold T CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the macro button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C;OK” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if clearing was successful. V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD AMP SOURCE TV OFF or ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME MACRO AMP y SOURCE • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 2. • Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). TV Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. 3 Press T MACRO again to exit the macro programming mode. Notes • “C;NG” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. • “ERROR” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control if you press more than one button simultaneously. 94 En USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION Using multi-zone configuration This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone 2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone 2). You can control this unit from the second zone using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second zone. Any source you want to listen to in the second zone must be connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Connecting Zone 2 You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second zone. • An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the infrared signal receiver in the second zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone. • An amplifier and speakers in the second zone. y • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone 2 connections that best meet your requirements. • Some Yamaha models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown below. REMOTE REMOTE Infrared signal receiver OUT REMOTE IN OUT Yamaha component This unit REMOTE IN ADVANCED OPERATION IN OUT Yamaha component ■ Using the external amplifier Connect the amplifier/receiver in the second zone and other components to this unit as follows. From the ZONE 2 OUT jacks Amplifier Main zone Second zone (Zone 2) Infrared signal receiver Remote control DVD player This unit Infrared signal emitter From the REMOTE OUT jacks From the REMOTE IN jacks English Note To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 95 En Using multi-zone configuration ■ Using the internal amplifier of this unit Important safety notice The EXTRA SP speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per channel. Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage. Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This information is found on the back panel of your Receiver. Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA SP speaker terminals and then set the “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “ZONE2” (see page 70). FRONT B/ZONE2/ PRESENCE EXTRA SP L R Second zone (Zone 2) This unit Main zone y • You can use the FRONT B speakers as the front speaker system of another zone. Set “EXTRA SP ASSIGN” to “FRONT B” and then “FRONT B” to “ZONE B” (see page 70). • When you use the internal amplifiers for the Zone 2 speakers, you can adjust the volume level and set the initial volume level and maximum volume level of the Zone 2 speakers (see page 80). Controlling Zone 2 You can select and control Zone 2 by using the control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. The available operations are as follows: • Selecting the input source of Zone 2 • Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as the input source of Zone 2 (see page 50) • Enjoying music stored on your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source (see page 56) Note You must complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing in the front panel display. Otherwise, the Zone 2 mode is automatically canceled and this unit returns to the normal operation mode. In this case, repeat the Zone 2 selection procedure. ■ Controlling Zone 2 with the front panel Turning on Zone 2 Press 8 ZONE 2 ON/OFF to turn on Zone 2. y 8 ZONE 2 ON/OFF is operational only when B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. Once B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position, you can also press I POWER or H STANDBY on the remote control to turn on the main zone and Zone 2 or set them to the standby mode. Activating the Zone 2 operation mode Press 9 ZONE CONTROL to control Zone 2. The ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 10 seconds. ZONE2 Flashes 96 En Using multi-zone configuration Operate the following operations after activating the Zone 2 operation mode. Operating Zone 2 Rotate the I INPUT selector to select the desired input source while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing in the front panel display. • Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the TUNER features in Zone 2. For details about the TUNER operations, see “FM/AM tuning” on page 50. • Select “V-AUX” as the input source to use iPod features in Zone 2. For details about the iPod operations, see “Using iPod™” on page 56. y You must complete this step within 10 seconds while the selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press 9 ZONE CONTROL on the front panel again. Turning on or off Zone 2 using the remote control I POWER and H STANDBY on the remote control work differently depending on the selected zone that appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. • When the main zone, Zone 2 mode is selected, you can turn on the main zone or Zone 2 or set them to the standby mode individually. • When the all mode is selected, pressing I POWER turns on the main zone and Zone 2 simultaneously and pressing H STANDBY sets them to the standby mode simultaneously. Control mode Main zone mode Zone 2 mode POWER and STANDBY Display window (J) Name of the selected input area Turns on the main zone only or sets it to the standby mode. “ZONE 2” or “2;name of the selected input area” Turns on Zone 2 or sets it to the standby mode. I POWER: turns Set Zone 2 to the standby mode Press 8 ZONE 2 ON/OFF to set Zone 2 to the standby mode. Activating the Zone 2 operation mode Set the operation mode selector to L AMP and then press J SELECT k repeatedly to select the zone you want to control. “ZONE 2” is displayed in the display window (J) on the remote control. AMP SOURCE SELECT TV “ALL” Notes • When the remote control is in the main zone mode, “MAIN” appears for a few seconds when I POWER or H STANDBY is pressed. • “ALL” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control only when SELECT n is pressed. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Controlling Zone 2 with the remote control All mode on the main zone and Zone 2. H STANDBY: sets the main zone and Zone 2 to the standby mode. Selecting the input source of Zone 2 Press one of the input selector buttons (B) to select the input source of the selected zone. If the remote control is used to select the input source, “2; name of the selected input area” is displayed in the display window (J) on the remote control when Zone 2 is selected respectively. Note The selected input source is shared across all zones. English 97 En ADVANCED SETUP Advanced setup This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Notes • The settings you make are reflected next time you press B MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see page 25). • Only B MASTER ON/OFF, C TONE CONTROL and the D PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu. • No other operations can be made while you are using the advanced setup menu. • The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display. Using the advanced setup 1 Press B MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. 2 Press and hold C TONE CONTROL and then press B MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. TONE CONTROL While holding down MASTER ON 3 OFF Rotate the D PROGRAM selector to select the parameter you want to adjust. The name of the selected parameter appears in the front panel display. See page 99 for a complete list of available parameters. SPIMP.-8MIN Currently selected parameter 98 En Currently selected parameter setting 4 Press C TONE CONTROL repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. 5 Press B MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. y The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. Advanced setup See page 98 for the operation of the advanced setup. ■ Speaker impedance SP IMP. Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 8Ω MIN, 6Ω MIN • Select “8Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω . • Select “6Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω . SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Front If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.* 8Ω MIN ■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote control recognition. This feature is useful when you operate this unit and the other Yamaha receivers/ amplifiers in the same room separately. Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID code is set to “2001”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID code is set to “2002”. Setting remote control AMP ID codes You need to set the remote control AMP ID code for the remote control. 1 Set the operation mode selector to L AMP or L SOURCE. 2 Press and hold T LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object and then press D l / h repeatedly until “L;AMP” appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. Center Surround The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Surround back PRESET/CH If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. LEARN ADVANCED OPERATION ENTER A/B/C/D/E Front If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. 6Ω MIN Center Surround The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Notes Surround back * • Be sure to press and hold T LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems (A and B) simultaneously when “SP IMP.” is set to “8Ω MIN”. ■ User presets PRESET Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings (see page 109). Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit. 3 Press D ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected input area appears in the display window (J) on the remote control. Notes English • This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. 99 En ■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Fernbedienung/Fjärrkontrollen Afstandsbediening/Пульт ДУ X Y H A B POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER 1 2 PHONO MULTI CH IN 3 4 V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – SOURCE TV MUTE C I SCENE LEVEL TV INPUT PRESET/CH TITLE MUTE AUDIO BAND D K L TV SET MENU MENU J M N O PURE DIRECT P STRAIGHT Q R ENTER U A/B/C/D/E E DISPLAY RETURN LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STEREO NIGHT 5 6 9 0 F STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 5 6 7 9 0 + 10 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE 4 NIGHT 7 8 V W 8 SLEEP ENT S REC FREQ/TEXT OFF ON EON MACRO APPENDIX G CLASSICAL CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB MODE- PTY SEEK- START LEARN CLEAR RENAME T ii List of remote control codes Liste des codes de commande Liste der Fernbedienungscodes Lista över fjärrstyrningskoder Lijst met afstandsbedieningscodes Список кодов дистанционного управления CABLE CD PLAYER ABC 0030, 0035 AMERICAST 0926 BELL SOUTH 0926 BIRMINGHAM CABLE COMMUNICATIONS 0303 BRITISH TELECOM 0030 CABLE & WIRELESS 1095 DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 DIRECTOR 0503 FILMNET 0470 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837, GOLDSTAR 0171 HAMLIN 0036, 0300 JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837 LG 0171 MNET 0470 MEMOREX 0027 MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837, 1133 NTL 1095 NOOS 0844 ONO 1095 PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 0030 PACE 0264, 1087, 1095 PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134 PARAGON 0027 PHILIPS 0332, 0344 PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904, 1904 PULSAR 0027 QUASAR 0027 REGAL 0300, 0306 RUNCO 0027 SAGEM 0844 SAMSUNG 0027, 0171 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 SONY 1033 STARCOM 0030 SUPERCABLE 0303 TS 0030 TELE+1 0470 TELEWEST 1095 TORX 0030 TOSHIBA 0027 TRANS PX 0303 UNITED CABLE 0030 ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926 AIWA 0184 ARCAM 0184 AUDIO RESEARCH 0184 AUDIO TON 0184 AUDIOLAB 0184 AUDIOMECA 0184 CAIRN 0184 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 0056 CARVER 0184, 0206 CYRUS 0184 DKK 0027 DMX ELECTRONICS 0184 DENON 0900 DYNAMIC BASS 0206 EMERSON 0332 FISHER 0206 GENEXXA 0059, 0332 GOODMANS 0332 GRUNDIG 0184 HARMAN/KARDON 0184, 0200 HITACHI 0059 JVC 0099 KENWOOD 0055, 0064 KRELL 0184 LXI 0332 LINN 0184 MCS 0056 MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332 MARANTZ 0056, 0184 MATSUI 0184 MEMOREX 0332 MERIDIAN 0184 MICROMEGA 0184 MIRO 0027 MISSION 0184 MYRYAD 0184 NAD 0027 NSM 0184 NAIM 0184 OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064, 0206, 0332 PANASONIC 0056 PHILIPS 0184 PIONEER 0059, 0332 POLK AUDIO 0184 PROTON 0184 QED 0184 QUAD 0184 QUASAR 0056 RCA 0059, 0206, 0332 REALISTIC 0206 REVOX 0184 ROTEL 0184 iii SAE 0184 SANSUI 0184, 0332 SANYO 0206 SCOTT 0332 SEARS 0332 SHARP 0064 SIMAUDIO 0184 SONIC FRONTIERS 0184 SONY 0027 SYMPHONIC 0332 TAG MCLAREN 0184 TANDY 0059 TECHNICS 0056 THORENS 0184 THULE 0184 UNIVERSUM 0184 VICTOR 0099 WARDS 0184 YAMAHA 2300, 2301 CD RECORDER KENWOOD MARANTZ PHILIPS YAMAHA 0653 0653 0653 2400 DVD PLAYER ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 0757 ALBA 0744 AMSTRAD 0740 APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744, 0782, 0821, 0823, 0857, 1127 BLAUPINKT 0744 BLUE PARADE 0598 BUSH 0740 CENTREX 0699 CLATRONIC 0815 CYBERHOME 0741 DVD2000 0548 DAEWOO 0811, 0797 DANSAI 0797 DECCA 0797 DENON 0517 DIAMOND 0795 DIGITREX 0699 EMERSON 0618 ENTERPRISE 0618 FISHER 0697 GE 0549, 0744 GO VIDEO 0742 GOLDSTAR 0768 GRADIENTE 0678 GREENHILL 0744 GRUNDIG 0566 HITACHI 0600, 0691 HITEKER JVC KLH KENWOOD KOSS LG LIMIT MAGNAVOX MARANTZ MEMOREX MICO MICROSOFT MINTEK MITSUBISHI MUSTEK NESA ONKYO ORITRON PALSONIC PANASONIC PHILIPS 0699 0585, 0650 0744 0517, 0561 0678 0768 0795 0530, 0702 0566 0858 0750 0549 0744 0548 0757 0744 0530 0678 0699 0517, 0659, 1389 0530, 0566, 0673, 0881 PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658, 0659 POLK AUDIO 0566 PROSCAN 0549 QWESTAR 0678 RCA 0549, 0598, 0744 ROTEL 0650 SM ELECTRONIC 0757 SAMSUNG 0600 SANYO 0697 SHARP 0657 SHERWOOD 0797 SHINSONIC 0560 SLIM ART 0811 SONY 0560, 0891 SYLVANIA 0702 TATUNG 0797 TEAC 0598, 0744 TECHNICS 0517 THETA DIGITAL 0598 THOMSON 0549 TOSHIBA 0530 URBAN CONCEPTS 0530 XBOX 0549 YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572, 2100 ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768 ZEUS 0811 DVD RECORDER HITACHI PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER TOSHIBA YAMAHA 2815 2800 2808 2804 2803 2807 LD PLAYER CARVER DENON MARANTZ MITSUBISHI NAD NAGSMI OPTIMUS PHILIPS PIONEER SALORA SONY TELEFUNKEN YAMAHA 0091 0086 0091 0086 0086 0086 0086 0091 0086 0091 0228 0086 2200 MD RECORDER KENWOOD ONKYO SHARP SONY YAMAHA 0708 0895 0888 0517 2500, 2501, 2502 RECEIVER (TUNER) ADC AIWA 1116, 1216, 1293, 1295, 1296, 1310, 1316 PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050, 1411 POLK AUDIO 1316 PROSCAN 1281 QUASAR 0066 RCA 0558, 1050, 1281, 1417, 1636, SABA 0558 SANSUI 1116 SCHNEIDER 0558 SONY 0185, 1085, 1185, 1685, 1785 STEREOPHONICS 1050 SUNFIRE 1340 TEAC 1417 TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336, 1545 TELEFUNKEN 0558 THOMSON 1281 THORENS 1216 UHER 0558 VENTURER 1417 VICTOR 0101 WARDS 0041, 0185 YAMAHA 0203, 1203, 1358, 2601 (TUNER ID1) 2602 (TUNER ID2) 2603 (iPod) 2606 SATELLITE TUNER @SAT 1327 ABSAT 0150 ALBA 0482 ALPHASTAR 0799 AMSTRAD 0874 ASTON 0169, 1156 ASTRO 0200 ATSAT 1327 AVALON 0423 BLAUPUNKT 0200 BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 0874, 1202 CANAL DIGITAL 0880 CANAL SATELLITE 0880 CANAL+ 0880 CHAPARRAL 0243 CITYCOM 1203 CONNEXIONS 0423 CROSSDIGITAL 1136 CYRUS 0227 D-BOX 0750, 1154 DMT 1102 DNT 0227, 0423 DAERYUNG 0423 DAEWOO 1323 DIGENIUS 0326 DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593, 0666, 0751, 0776, 0846, 1103, 1136, 1169, 1776, 1883 DISH NETWORK SYSTEM 0802, 1032 DISHPRO 0802, 1032 DISTRATEL 0111 DREAM MULTIMEDIA 1264 ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637, 0802, 0880, 0898, 1032, 1113 ENGEL 1044 EXPRESSVU 0802 FTE 0890 FINLUX 0482 FRACARRO 0898 FUBA 0423 GE 0593 GOI 0802 GALAXIS 0890, 1138 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0896 GOLD BOX 0880 GRUNDIG 0200, 0874 HTS 0802 HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423 HITACHI 0482, 0846 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM 0776, 1169, 1776 HUMAX 0890, 1203 INVIDEO 0898 JVC 0802 KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227, 0276, 0685, 1248 KREISELMEYER 0200 LABGEAR 1323 LOGIX 1044 LORENZEN 0326 MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751 MANHATTAN 0482, 1044, 1110 MARANTZ 0227 MEDIASAT 0880 MEMOREX 0751 METRONIC 0111 MITSUBISHI 0776 MOTOROLA 0896 MYRYAD 0227 NEXT LEVEL 0896 NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778, 1154, 1250, 1750 OCTALTV 1032 ORBITECH 1127 PACE 0482, 0874, 1202, 1350 PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874, 1347 PANDA 0482 PAYSAT 0751 PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482, 0749, 0751, 0776, 0880, 1103, 1169, 1776 PIONEER 0880 PROMAX 0482 PROSCAN 0419, 0593 RCA 0170, 0419, 0593, 0882 RFT 0227 RADIOSHACK 0896 RADIOLA 0227 RADIX 0423 SKY 0874, 0883, 1202 SM ELECTRONIC 1227 SABRE 0482 SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280 SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303, 1319 SAT CONTROL 1327 SATSTATION 1110 SCHWAIGER 1138 SEEMANN 0423 SIEMENS 0200 SONY 0666, 0874, 1666 STAR CHOICE 0896 STRONG 1327 TPS 0847, 1280 TANTEC 0482 TECHNISAT 1126, 1127 TELESTAR 1127 THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073, 1318 TOPFIELD 1233 TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776 ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666 UNIDEN 0749, 0751 UNIVERSUM 0200 VENTANA 0227 WISI 0200, 0423, 0482 XSAT 0150 ZEHNDER 1102 ZENITH 0883, 1883 TAPE DECK AIWA 0056 CARVER 0056 GRUNDIG 0056 HARMAN/KARDON 0056 MAGNAVOX 0056 MARANTZ 0056 MYRYAD 0056 OPTIMUS 0054 PHILIPS 0056 PIONEER 0054 POLK AUDIO 0056 RCA 0054 REVOX 0056 SANSUI 0056 SONY 0270 THORENS 0056 WARDS 0054 YAMAHA 2700,2701 TV AGB AOC ASA AWA ACURA ADDISON ADMIRAL ADVENT AIKO AKAI AKURA ALBA 0543 0036, 0057, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0135, 0205, 0207, 0478 0131 0036 0036 0119, 0135, 0680 0120, 0190, 0490 0788 0119 0036, 0057, 0235, 0388, 0543, 0729, 0839 0291 0036, 0064, 0398, 0695 iv APPENDIX 0558 0185, 1116, 1415, 1432, 1668 ALCO 1417 ANAM 1636 APEX DIGITAL 1284 AUDIOLAB 1216 AUDIOTRONIC 1216 AUDIOVOX 1417 BOSE 1256 CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS 1397 CAPETRONIC 0558 CARVER 1116, 1216 CENTREX 1284 DENON 1387 FERGUSON 0558 FINE ARTS 1216 GRUNDIG 1216 HARMAN/KARDON 0137, 1331 INTEGRA 0162, 1325 JBL 0137, 1333 JVC 0101, 0558, 1401, 1522 KLH 1417, 1439 KENWOOD 1054, 1340 MCS 0066 MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216, 1296, MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216, 1316 MICROMEGA 1216 MUSICMAGIC 1116 MYRYAD 1216 NAD 0347 NORCENT 1416 ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325 OPTIMUS 0558, 1050 PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545, 1790 PHILIPS AMERICA ACTION 0207 AMPRO 0778 AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198, 0398, 0439, 0460, 0543 ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277 ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677 ANITECH 0036 APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792, 0794 AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136 BANG & OLUFSEN 0592 BASIC 0036 BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539 BAYSONIC 0207 BEAUMARK 0205 BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741, 0742 BELL & HOWELL 0181 BEON 0064 BLAUPUNKT 0222 BLUE SKY 0695, 1064 BONDSTEC 0274 BRADFORD 0207 BRANDT 0136, 0362 BROKSONIC 0263, 0490 BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398, 0401, 0695, 1064 CCE 0064 CGE 0274 CTC 0274 CXC 0207 CANDLE 0057 CARNIVALE 0057 CARVER 0081, 0197 CASCADE 0036 CATHAY 0064 CELEBRITY 0027 CELERA 0792 CENTURION 0064 CHANGHONG 0792 CHING TAI 0036, 0119 CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119, 0207 CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207 CIMLINE 0036 CINERAL 0119, 0478 CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119 CLARION 0207 CLARIVOX 0064 CLATRONIC 0274, 0397 CONDOR 0347, 0397 CONRAC 0835 CONTEC 0036, 0207 CRAIG 0207 CROSLEY 0081 CROWN 0036, 0064, 0207, 0397, 0445 CURTIS MATHES 057, 0074, 0081, 0087, 0120, 0172, 0181, 0193, 0478, 0729, 1174, 1374 DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064, 0119, 0135, 0181, 0197, 0205, 0207, 0401, 0478, 0650, 0661, 1688 DANSAI 0064 DAYTON 0036 DE GRAAF 0235, 0575 v DECCA 0064, 0543 DENON 0172 DIGATRON 0064 DIXI 0036, 0064 DUMONT 0044 DWIN 0747, 0801 ECE 0064 ELBE 0286 ELECTROBAND 0027 ELIN 0064, 0575 ELITE 0347 ELTA 0036 EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0388, 0490, 0650 ENVISION 0057,0840 EPSON 0860 ERRES 0064 ETHER 0036, 0057 ETRON 0036 EUROPHON 0543 FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136, 0265, 0314, 0362, 0587 FIDELITY 0388 FINLANDIA 0235, 0373 FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132, 0373, 0543 FIRSTAR 0036, 0263 FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695 FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235, 0397 FLINT 0482 FORMENTI 0064, 0347 FORTRESS 0120 FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291 FUJITSU 0710, 0836 FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291 FUTURETECH 0207 GE 0057, 0074, 0078, 0119, 0205, 0207, 0478, 0587, 1174, 1374, 1481 GEC 0064, 0543 GATEWAY 1782, 1783 GELOSO 0036 GENEXXA 0190 GIBRALTER 0044, 0057 GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136, 0181, 0205, 0404 GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401, 0661 GOREMJE 0397 GRADIENTE 0080, 0197 GRAETZ 0190, 0388 GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366, 0543 GRANDIN 0637 GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514, 0583, 0614 GRUNPY 0207 HCM 0036, 0439 HALLMARK 0205 HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207 HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388, 0455, 0583 HANTAREX 0543 HARMAN/KARDON 0081 HARVARD 0207 HAVERMY 0120 HELLO KITTY 0478 HINARI HISAWA HITACHI HUA TUN HUANYU HYPSON ICE ITS ITT IMPERIAL INDIANA INFINITY INGELEN INNO HIT INNOVA INTEQ INTERFUNK 0036, 0064 0482 0036, 0057, 0119, 0132, 0136, 0172, 0190, 0205, 0252, 0383, 0508, 0575, 0605, 1172, 1283 0036 0401 0064, 0291 0291, 0398 0398 0190, 0388, 0575 0274, 0397, 0445 0064 0081 0190 0543 0064 0044 0064, 0190, 0274, 0388, 0539 INTERVISION 0064, 0291, 0404 0081 0027 0080, 0398, 0490, 0680, 0710 JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119, 0183, 0263 JENSEN 0788 KEC 0207 KTV 0057, 0207 KAISUI 0036 KAPSCH 0190 KARCHER 0637 KATHREIN 0583 KENDO 0064 KENWOOD 0057 KNEISSEL 0286, 0462 KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207 KORPEL 0064 KOYODA 0036 L&S ELECTRONIC 0835 LG 0057, 0064, 0087, 0135, 0205, 0741 LXI 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0205 LEYCO 0064, 0291 LIESENK & TTER 0064 LOEWE 0539 LUXOR 0383, 0388 M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064, 0131, 0132, 0136, 0190, 0314, 0373, 0401, 0507 MGA 0057, 0177, 0205 MTC 0057, 0087, 0539 MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543 MAGNAFON 0543 MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281, 1481 MANESTH 0291, 0347 MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081, 0583 MARK 0064 MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235, 0398, 0514, 0543 MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677 MEDIATOR 0064 JBL JCB JVC MEDION MEGATRON MEMOREX METZ MICROMAXX 0695, 0835, 1064 0172, 0205 0036, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0277, 0490, 1064 0474 0835 0835 0044, 0074, 0078 0514 0439 0057, 0120, 0135, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0277, 0539, 0863, 1277 MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543, 0636 MOTOROLA 0120 MULTITECH 0036, 0207 MYRYAD 0583 NAD 0183, 0205, 0388, 0893 NEC 0036, 0057, 0078, 0181, 0183, 0197, 0205, 0482, 0524, 1731 NEI 0064 NTC 0119 NECKERMANN 0064, 0583 NETSAT 0064 NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120, 0205 NIKKAI 0064, 0291 NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205 NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507, 0575, 0658 NORCENT 0775, 0851 NORDMENDE 0136, 0314, 0587 OCEANIC 0190, 0388 ONWA 0207, 0460 OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277, 0677 OPTONICA 0120 ORION 0064, 0263, 0347, 0490, 0543 OSAKI 0291, 0439 OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347, 0539, 0583 PALLADIUM 0397, 0445 PANAMA 0291 PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081, 0190, 0277, 0677, 1437 PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347 PAUSA 0036 PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078, 0087, 0183, 0205, 1374 PERDIO 0347 PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081, 0172, 0205, 0207, 0274, 0490, 1688 PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0119, 0135, 0205, 0401, 0583, 0717, 1481 PHONOLA 0064 PILOT 0057 MICROSTAR MIDLAND MINERVA MINOKA MITSUBISHI PIONEER SEMIVOX SEMP SHARP SHEN YING SHENG CHIA SIAREM SIEMENS SINUDYNE SKANTIC SKYGIANT SKYWORTH SOLAVOX SONITRON SONOKO SONOLOR SONTEC SONY 0207 0183 0057, 0120, 0677 0036, 0119 0036, 0120, 0263 0543 0064, 0222 0543 0383 0207 0064 0190 0235 0036, 0064 0190, 0235 0064 0027, 0677, 0861, 1127, 1532, 1678 SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207 SOUNDWAVE SOWA 0064, 0445 0078, 0087, 0119, 0183, 0205 SQUAREVIEW STANDARD STARLITE STERN SUPREME SYLVANIA SYMPHONIC SYNCO SYSLINE T+A TCM TMK TNCI TVS TACICO TAI YI TANDY TASHIKO TATUNG TEAC TEC TECHNEMA TECHNICS TECHWOOD TECO TEKNIKA 0198 0036 0207 0190, 0286 0027 0057, 0081, 0198 0198, 0207 0027, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0478 0064 0474 0835 0205 0044 0490 0036, 0119, 0205 0036 0120, 0190 0119, 0677 0036, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0087, 0181, 0183, 0543 0036, 0064, 0291, 0439, 0445, 0482, 0695, 1064 0274 0347 0078, 0277, 0677 0078 0036, 0078, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0291, 0680 0081, 0087, 0119, 0177, 0207 TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289, 0362, 0652, 0729 TELEMEISTER TELETECH TENSAI TERA THOMSON THORN TOSHIBA 0347 0036 0347 0057 0136, 0314, 0587, 0652, 1474 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 0087, 0181, 0183, 0535, 0645, 0677, 0859, 1283, 1383, 1683, 1731 TRIUMPH TUNTEX UHER UNIVERSUM 0543 0036, 0057, 0119 0347 0064, 0131, 0132, 0291, 0373, 0397, 0519 VECTOR RESEARCH 0057 VESTEL 0064 VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677, 0680 VIDEOSAT 0274 VIDIKRON 0081 VIDTECH 0205 VIEWSONIC 1782 VISION 0347 VOXSON 0190 WALTHAM 0383 WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205, 0893 WATSON 0064, 0347 WAYCON 0183 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0064, 0347, 0490, 0650 YAMAHA 0057, 0172, 0677, 0796, 0860, 2900 (projector), 2901 (projector), 2903, 2904 (projector) YAPSHE 0277 YOKO 0064, 0291 ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205, 0490 VCR ASA ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA 0064, 0108 0075 0027 0305 0027, 0064, 0334, 0375, 0379 AKAI 0068, 0342 AKIBA 0099 ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342, 0379 AMERICA ACTION 0305 AMERICAN HIGH 0062 AMSTRAD 0027 ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267, 0305, 0507 ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589 ANITECH 0099 ASHA 0267 ASUKA 0064 AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305 BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131 BASIC LINE 0099, 0305 BEAUMARK 0267 BELL & HOWELL 0131 BLAUPUNKT 0253 BRANDT 0347 BRANDT ELECTRONIC 0068 BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506 BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379 CCE 0099, 0305 CGE 0027 CALIX 0064 CANON CARVER CIMLINE CINERAL CITIZEN COLT COMBITECH CRAIG 0062 0108 0099 0305 0064, 0305, 1305 0099 0379 0064, 0074, 0099, 0267 CROWN 0099, 0305 CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068, 0087, 1062 CYBERNEX 0267 CYRUS 0108 DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305, 0669, 1305 DANSAI 0099 DE GRAAF 0069 DECCA 0027, 0108 DENON 0069 DUAL 0068 DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131 DYNATECH 0027 ESC 0267, 0305 ELCATECH 0099 ELECTROHOME 0064 ELECTROPHONIC 0064 EMEREX 0059 EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064, 0070, 0072, 0211, 0267, 0305, 1305, 1506 FERGUSON 0068, 0347 FIDELITY 0027 FINLANDIA 0108, 0131 FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108, 0131 FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072, 0099 FISHER 0074, 0131 FUJI 0060, 0062 FUJITSU 0027, 0072 FUNAI 0027 GE 0062, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 GEC 0108 GARRARD 0027 GENERAL 0072 GO VIDEO 0459 GOLDHAND 0099 GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507, 1264 GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099, 0305 GRADIENTE 0027 GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267 GRANADA 0108, 0131 GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099 GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253, 0374 HCM 0099 HI-Q 0074 HANSEATIC 0064 HARLEY DAVIDSON 0027 HARMAN/KARDON 0108 HARWOOD 0099 HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379 HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068, 0069, 0267 vi APPENDIX 0136, 0190, 0193, 0314, 0706, 0787, 0893 PORTLAND 0119 PRANDONI-PRINCE 0543 PRIMA 0788 PRISM 0078 PROFEX 0036, 0388 PROSCAN 0074 PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274, 0291, 0445, 0695 PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205 PULSAR 0044 QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677 QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 R-LINE 0064 RCA 0027, 0057, 0074, 0117, 0119, 0205, 0706, 1074, 1174, 1274, 1374, 1474, 1481, 1574 RFT 0455 RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074, 0181, 0205, 0207 RADIOLA 0064 RADIOMARELLI 0543 REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205, 0207 REDIFFUSION 0388 REOC 0741 REVOX 0064 REX 0190, 0286, 0291 ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445 RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524, 0630 SBR 0064 SEG 0291, 0695 SEI 0543 SKY 0064 SSS 0207 SABA 0136, 0190, 0314, 0362 SACCS 0265 SAGEM 0637 SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543 SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388, 0575 SAMBERS 0543 SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119, 0120, 0181, 0198, 0205, 0677, 1782 SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064, 0087, 0117, 0119, 0181, 0205, 0291, 0397, 0583, 0614, 0645, 0729, 0793, 0839, 0841 SANSEI 0478 SANSUI 0490 SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207, 0235, 0366, 0826 SCHAUB LORENZ 0388 SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398, 0695 SCOTCH 0205 SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263 SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0198, 0205 SELECO 0190, 0286 RX-V661_G-cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, December 19, 2006 10:57 PM G MINOLTA MITSUBISHI 0069 0068, 0070, 0094, 0108, 0834 MOTOROLA 0062, 0075 MULTITECH 0027, 0099 MURPHY 0027 MYRYAD 0108 NAD 0131 NEC 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075, 0094, 0131 NATIONAL 0253 NECKERMANN 0108 NESCO 0099 NEWAVE 0064 NIKKO 0064 NOBLEX 0267 NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267 NORDMENDE 0068, 0347 OCEANIC 0027, 0068 OKANO 0342, 0375 OLYMPUS 0062, 0253 OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131, 0459 ORION 0211, 0375, 0379, 1506 OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099 OTTO VERSAND 0108 PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099 PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253, 0643, 1062, 1589 PATHE MARCONI 0068 PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069, 0267, 1062, 1264 PENTAX 0069 PERDIO 0027 PHILCO 0062 PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208 PHONOLA 0108 PILOT 0064 PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108 POLK AUDIO 0108 PROFITRONIC 0267 PROLINE 0027 PROSCAN 0087, 1087 PROTEC 0099 PULSAR 0066 PYE 0108 QUASAR 0062, 1062 QUELLE 0108 RCA 0062, 0069, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 RADIOSHACK 0027 RADIOLA 0108 RADIX 0064 RANDEX 0064 REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064, 0074, 0075, 0131 REOC 0375 REPLAYTV 0641, 0643 REX 0068 ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267, 0305 RUNCO 0066 SBR 0108 SEG 0267 SEI 0108 STS 0069 SABA 0068, 0347 SALORA 0070 SAMPO 0064, 0075 SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459 SANKY 0066, 0075 SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094, 1506 SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267 SAVILLE 0379 SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068, 0131 SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108 SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211 SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064, 0069, 0074, 0131, 1264 SELECO 0068 SEMP 0072 SHARP 0075, 0834 SHINTOM 0099, 0131 SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131 SILVA 0064 SINGER 0072, 0099 SINUDYNE 0108 SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0059, 0060, 0062, 0663, 1259 SUNKAI 0375 SUNSTAR 0027 SUNTRONIC 0027 © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108, 0070, 1808 SYMPHONIC 0027 TMK 0267 TANDY 0027, 0131 TASHIKO 0027, 0064 TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072, 0094, 0108 TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669 TECHNICS 0062, 0253 TECO 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075 TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064 TELEAVIA 0068 TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347 TENOSAL 0099 TENSAI 0027 THOMAS 0027 THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094, 0347 THORN 0068, 0131 TIVO 0645, 0663 TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072, 0094, 0108, 0872 TOTEVISION 0064, 0267 UHER 0267 UNITECH 0267 UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108, 0267 VECTOR 0072 VICTOR 0068, 0094 VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072 VIDEOMAGIC 0064 VIDEOSONIC 0267 VILLAIN 0027 WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0087, 0099, 0108, 0267 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0099 XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099 YAMAHA 0068 YAMISHI 0099 YOKAN 0099 YOKO 0267 ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066, 1506 All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WJ70020 RX-V661 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 0069 HYPSON 0099 ITT 0068, 0131, 0267 ITV 0064, 0305 IMPERIAL 0027 INTERFUNK 0108 JVC 0068, 0072, 0094 JENSEN 0068 KEC 0064, 0305 KLH 0099 KAISUI 0099 KENWOOD 0068, 0094 KODAK 0062, 0064 KOLIN 0068, 0070 KORPEL 0099 LG 0064, 0069, 0072, 0507 LXI 0064 LENCO 0305 LEYCO 0099 LLOYD’S 0027 LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589 LOGIK 0099, 0267 LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131 M ELECTRONIC 0027 MEI 0062 MGA 0070, 0267 MGN TECHNOLOGY 0267 MTC 0027, 0267 MAGNASONIC 1305 MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066, 0108, 1808 MAGNIN 0267 MANESTH 0072, 0099 MARANTZ 0062, 0108 MARTA 0064 MATSUI 0375, 0379 MATSUSHITA 0062 MEDION 0375 MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064, 0066, 0074, 0075, 0131, 0267, 0334, 0375, 1264 MEMPHIS 0099 METZ 0064, 0374, 1589 RX-V661 AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ 00_sheet_RX-V861-661_G.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 17, 2007 10:08 AM G RX-V861/RX-V661 The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual. Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi. Die umkreisten Zahlen und Buchstaben entsprechen denen in der Bedienungsanleitung. Inringade nummer och bokstäver motsvarar de som anges i bruksanvisningen. De omcirkelde cijfers en letters corresponderen met die in de Gebruiksaanwijzing. Цифры и буквы в кружках относятся к цифрам и буквам в Инструкции по эксплуатации. ■ Front panel/Face avant/Frontblende/Frontpanelen/Voorpaneel/Фронтальная панель 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 VOLUME SPEAKERS EDIT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L ZONE 2 ON/OFF ZONE CONTROL SCENE 2 1 3 4 INPUT PROGRAM MAIN ZONE MASTER PHONES STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL PURE DIRECT AUDIO SELECT VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC ON/OFF ON A OFF EFFECT SILENT CINEMA B S VIDEO C D E F G H I J VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 00_sheet_RX-V861-661_G.book Page i Wednesday, January 17, 2007 10:08 AM ■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Fernbedienung/Fjärrkontrollen/ Afstandsbediening/Пульт ДУ X Y H A B POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER 1 2 PHONO MULTI CH IN 3 4 V-AUX/DOCK TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL DVR VCR DVD SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME SOURCE – TV MUTE C I SCENE LEVEL – – TV INPUT MUTE PRESET/CH TITLE AUDIO BAND D K L TV SET MENU MENU J M N O PURE DIRECT P STRAIGHT Q R ENTER U A/B/C/D/E E DISPLAY RETURN LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STEREO NIGHT 5 6 9 0 F STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 5 6 7 9 0 + 10 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE 4 NIGHT 7 8 V W 8 SLEEP G CLASSICAL CLASSICAL ENT S REC FREQ/TEXT OFF ON EON MACRO MODE- PTY SEEK- START LEARN CLEAR RENAME T Printed in Malaysia WK14520